inglés ateca owner’s manualateca owner’s manual ateca inglés 575012720bq (07.20) 575012720bq...

A T E C AOwner’s manual

A

TE

CA

Ingl

és (

07.2

0)

575012720BQ

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BQ (

07.2

0)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a CUPRAvehicle.

With your new CUPRA, you will be able to en-joy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technolo-gy and top quality features.

We recommend reading this InstructionManual carefully to learn more about yourvehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits inyour daily driving.

Information about handling is complemen-ted with instructions regarding the operationand maintenance of the vehicle in order toensure its safety and maintain its value.Moreover, we want to give you valuable ad-vice and tips to drive your vehicle efficientlyand respecting the environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

CUPRA

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 32, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of thevehicle at the time of drafting this text. Someof the features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, for-wards, backwards) in this manual refer to thetravel direction of the vehicle unless other-wise stated.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement forthe instruction manual. Access the instruc-tion manual to see the complete informationand warnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or onlyoffered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaran-tee that the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continueson the next page.

You can access the information in this man-ual using:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the envi-ronment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Digital instruction manualThe digital version of the manual can befound on the official CUPRA website:

Fig. 1 CUPRA website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.cupraofficial.com/owners/cupra-car-model-manuals.html

and select your vehicle.

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants . . . . . . 13Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . 16How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21PreCrash system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Information, assistance and emergency call serv-ice* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Instruments and warning/control lamps . . . . . . . . 66Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Infotainment operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174voice control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Radio/Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Navigation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200DSG automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Driving modes (Drive Profile)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

5

Table of Contents

Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driver assistance sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . . 217Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Emergency brake assistance system (Front As-sist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Side Assist with Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)* . . . 239Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Stabilisation and brake assistance systems . . . . . . . . 248Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Assisted parking system (Park Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Parking aid parking and manoeuvring (ParkPi-lot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)* . . . . . . . 267Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273Electrically unlocking trailer hook* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Engine management and emissions control sys-tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29612-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Accessories and modifications to the vehicle . . . 320Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . . . . . . . 320

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Information stored by the control units . . . . . . . . . . . 323Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Indications about the technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Levels control– Oil ››› page 290– Brake fluid ››› page 295– Battery ››› page 297Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 289– Open/close ››› page 289

A

B

Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 54– Tow-start ››› page 52

C Driving assistance sensors ››› page 216Front multifunction cameraRear-view cameras “Area View”Front camera “Area View”Front radarParking aid sensorsPark assist sensor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


Exterior view

Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 103– Emergency opening ››› page 107Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 54– Tow-start ››› page 52Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 101– Central locking ››› page 92– Emergency lock ››› page 101

A

B

C

Fuel tank– Fuel capacity ››› page 327– Open/Close cap ››› page 284Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 42– Wheel change ››› page 44

D

E

Driving assistance sensors ››› page 216Rear view cameraParking aid sensorsRear radarsPark assist sensor

1

2

3

4

8


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 107Central locking ››› page 92Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 122Open bonnet lever ››› page 289Headlight switch ››› page 112Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 114

1

2

3

4

5

6

Cruise control ››› page 220Warning lamps ››› page 81Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 120Driver information system ››› page 80Infotainment system ››› page 84

7

8

9

10

Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 27Fuses ››› page 56Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15Starter button ››› page 196Air conditioning ››› page 144Hazard warning lights ››› page 118

11

12

13

14

15

16

9


Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever ››› page 289Infotainment system ››› page 84Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 27Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 114Cruise control ››› page 220

1

2

3

4

Warning lamps ››› page 81Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 120Driver information system ››› page 80Headlight switch ››› page 112Central locking ››› page 92Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 122

5

6

7

8

9

10

Electric windows ››› page 107Fuses ››› page 56Hazard warning lights ››› page 118Air conditioning ››› page 144Starter button ››› page 196Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 15

11

12

13

14

15

16

10


Interior view

Armrest ››› page 137Isofix anchors ››› page 33Headrest adjustment ››› page 126Seat belts ››› page 16Panoramic roof ››› page 109Interior mirror ››› page 122

1

2

3

4

5

6

Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 27Electronic parking brake ››› page 246

7

8

11

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documen-tation also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 131.

– Make sure that no objects can interferewith the pedals.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rearseats always have the headrests in the in-use position ››› page 126 .

– Instruct passengers to adjust the headrestsaccording to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 30.

– Assume the correct sitting position. In-struct your passengers also to assume aproper sitting position ››› page 13 .

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instructyour passengers also to fasten their seatbelts properly ››› page 16 .

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an ac-cident, the safety equipment may reducethe risk of injury. The following points cover

12

Safe driving

part of the safety equipment in your CU-PRA1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front and rear sideseats,● front airbags,● knee airbags,● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rearchild seat system● height-adjustable front headrests,● rear headrests with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position of vehi-cle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 2 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10inches).

Fig. 3 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driverand passengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if acorrect sitting position is adopted. CUPRArecommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, CUPRA recommendsthe following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edgeis at the same level as the top of your head,or as close as possible to the same level asthe top of your head and under no circum-stances below eye level. Keep the back ofyour neck as close as possible to the head-rest ››› Fig. 3 .● Short people must lower the headrestcompletely, even if your head is below its up-per edge.● Tall people must raise the headrest com-pletely. »

1) Depending on the version/market.13

Safety

● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 19.

The following also applies to the driver:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the steering wheel so it is at least25 cm (10 inches) away from the ster-num››› Fig. 2 and you can hold it with bothhands on both sides, on the outer part, withyour arms slightly bent.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Move the seat in such a way that you canstep on the pedals with your knees slightlybent and with a distance between the kneesand the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-ches) ››› Fig. 2 .● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.

● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and thedashboard check translation). If you are sit-ting closer than 25 cm, the airbag systemcannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rearseats.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited fortheir weight and height ››› page 30 .

● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the dashboard, for example, or out-side the window. Otherwise the airbag andseat belt may offer insufficient protectionand also increase the risk of injury in theevent of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect position

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protectiononly if the belt web is properly worn. Incor-rect sitting positions substantially reduce theprotective function of seat belts and, there-fore, increase the risk of severe or even le-thal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal inju-ries is especially heightened when a deploy-ing airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who hasassumed an incorrect sitting position. Thedriver is responsible for all people, particu-larly children, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of in-correct sitting positions that could be dan-gerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.

14

Safe driving

● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Steering wheel position adjustment

Fig. 4 Lever in the lower left side of the steeringcolumn.

Adjust the steering wheel before your tripand only when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 4 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 4 1 firmly upwards to en-sure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is in

motion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside ofthe ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-tions to reduce injuries when the driver'sfront airbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the accel-erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpairedto the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› . »

15

Safety

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal mustbe pressed down thoroughly in order to stopthe vehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 30.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 5 Instrument panel: left rear seat occupiedand corresponding seat belt fastened display.

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 5 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion.An audible warning will also be heard if thevehicle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seatbelt status is displayed for approximately 30

16

Seat belts

seconds. The indication can be hidden bypressing the button on the dash pan-el.

The protective function of seat belts

Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat belts willnot be thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help pre-vent uncontrolled movements that may re-sult in serious injury and reduce the risk ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in case of anaccident.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addi-tion, the front part of your vehicle and otherpassive safety features (such as the airbagsystem) are designed to absorb the kinetic

energy released in a collision. Taken togeth-er, all these features reduce the releasing ki-netic energy and consequently, the risk ofinjury. This is why it is so important to fastenseat belts before every trip, even when "justdriving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are on-ly triggered in some cases of head-on colli-sion. The front airbags will not be triggeredduring minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturns or accidents inwhich the airbag trigger threshold value inthe control unit is not exceeded.

Important safety instructions for theuse of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts of »

17

Safety

the buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat belts atregular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in an ac-cident and have been stretched must be re-placed by a specialised workshop. Renewalmay be necessary even if there is no appa-rent damage. The belt anchorage shouldalso be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat isthrown forward violently, hitting the driver who iswearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain:the moment a vehicle starts moving, a typeof energy called “kinetic energy” starts act-ing on both the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weightof the vehicle and of its passengers. Thehigher they are, the more energy there is tobe “absorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic en-ergy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands.In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 7.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could oth-erwise be thrown forward violently throughthe vehicle interior in an accident. Passen-gers in the rear seats who do not use seatbelts endanger not only themselves but alsothe front occupants ››› Fig. 8 .

18

Seat belts

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 9 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt intothe buckle.

Fig. 10 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and headrest correct-ly ››› page 13 .● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 9 .● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 10. The latch plate is released fromthe buckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an uprightposition and the seat belt is worn correctly,according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatal in-juries in the event of an accident or suddenbraking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

19

Safety

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 11 Correct seat belt and headrest positions,viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 12 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries onlywhen they are properly positioned. Further-more, if the webbing is correctly positioned,

the seat belt will hold the vehicle occupantsin the optimum position to ensure the airbagprovides the maximum protection. The seatbelt must therefore always be worn and thewebbing correctly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 13, Correct sit-ting position of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or be-hind the shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seatbelt must lie evenly across the chest and aslow as possible over the pelvis, never acrossthe stomach and must be worn properly atall times during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 12 .

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe position of the seat belt can be adaptedby adjusting the height of the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt mustlie on the centre of the shoulder, neveracross the neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stomach.The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if neces-sary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible over thepelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding” thestomach ››› Fig. 12 .● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correctly,don't pull it away from your body with yourhand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of

20

Seat belts

the belt webbing, contact a specialisedworkshop for help with any special devicesto ensure the optimum protection of theseat belt and airbag. CUPRA recommendstaking your car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front seats and the siderear seats1) are equipped with belt tension-ers.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions.

This retracts and tightens the seat belts, re-ducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. In case of overturn,the pre-tensioners do not activate unless thehead airbags are deployed.

Reversible seat belt tensioningIn specific driving situations, a reversible ten-sioning of the seat belts might take place››› page 22. For example:

● in the event of sudden brakes● in the event of oversteering or understeer-ing● in the event of minor collisions

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seat belttensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belttensioner is not reduced and that removed

parts do not cause any injuries or environ-mental pollution, regulations, which areknown to the specialised workshops, mustbe observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

1) Depending on version/market.21

Safety

PreCrash system*

How it works

The PreCrash system is an assistance systemthat actives a series of measures to protectthe occupants of the vehicles in potentiallyrisky situations, but which cannot prevent acollision.

It only works completely if no special drivingprofile is selected and if there are no operat-ing anomalies.

Basic featuresDepending on the legal provisions of thecountry and the features of the vehicle, incritical situations (e.g. in certain cases ofemergency braking or loss of control of thevehicle by the driver) the following functionscan be activated separately or at the sametime when the vehicle is travelling faster thanapproximately 30 km/h (20 mph).

● Reversible tensioning of front seat beltsthat are fastened.● Operation of the hazard warning lights.● Automatic closing of the windows untilthey are just cracked open and, dependingon the equipment, of the sunroof.

Depending on how critical the driving situa-tion is, the belts are either tightened individ-ually, or both belts at the same time.

In addition to Front AssistIn vehicles with Front Assist ››› page 224 ,within the limits of the system, information isassessed on the risk of collision with the ve-hicle in front. The functions of the PreCrashsystem may also be activated if there is a highlikelihood of a rear-end collision, or duringthe activation of Front Assist.

In addition to Side AssistIn vehicles with lane assist ››› page 239 , with-in the limitations of each system, informationis assessed on the risk of collision with trafficto the rear of the vehicle. If a rear-end colli-sion is highly likely, the functions of thePreCrash system may also be activated. Inthis situation, the hazard warning lights areturned on with a higher frequency of flashes.

In addition to the Emergency Assist systemIn vehicles with emergency assist, driver sta-tus information is assessed within the limita-tions of this system. The following PreCrashsystems may be activated if a lack of activityis detected:

● Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driv-er's seat belt.● Automatic closing of the windows untilthey are just cracked open and, dependingon the equipment, of the sunroof.

Activation of the PreCrash systemThe PreCrash system can be partially deacti-vated by deactivating the traction and / orstability control, depending on the equip-ment. When these vehicle safety controlsare switched on (by default, every time theignition is turned on), the system is fully acti-vated.

Driving profile selection settingsIn vehicles with driving profile selection,PreCrash adapts to suit the special vehicleconfiguration of the corresponding profile››› page 211.

Limited operationThe PreCrash system is not available or onlyhas limited availability in the following situa-tions:

● When the ASR and/or the ESC are discon-nected.● When driving in reverse.● When the airbag control unit is not operat-ing properly.● When there is a fault in the system itself, inthe ESC or in the Front Assist.

Problems and solutionsIf the PreCrash is not working correctly, themessage System unavailable or Systemwith limited features is shown

22

Airbag system

permanently on the dashboard display. Goto a specialized CUPRA Service or OfficialSEAT Service and ask for the system to bechecked.

WARNINGThe PreCrashsystem cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Risksthat compromise safety are never justifiedby the use of this system. The system is nota replacement for driver awareness andcannot prevent a collision.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● The system is not always able to recogniseobjects.● The system may not react to people oranimals or objects that cross length-wise orthat are hard to detect.● Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other el-ements of the public road or adverseweather conditions can hinder its opera-tion and thus its ability to detect collisionrisk.● Never ignore the warning lamps that lightup or the messages shown on the dash-board.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Never change settings on the Infotain-ment System while driving.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it so important to wear a seatbelt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always beworn properly and the correct sitting posi-tion must be assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the headrests properly. Therefore,it is most important to properly wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 16, The whys andwherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to be »

23

Safety

thrown forward into the area of the deploy-ing airbag. In this case, the inflating airbagmay inflict critical or fatal injuries on the oc-cupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are activated de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelera-tion occurring during the collision and meas-ured by the control unit remains below thespecified reference values, the front, sideand/or head-protection airbags will not betriggered. Take into account that the visibledamage in a vehicle involved in an accident,no matter how serious, is not a determiningfactor for the airbags to have been activated.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-

gered. Children up to 12 years old should al-ways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 16 .

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination withthe seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the followingmodules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Knee airbag for the driver● Side airbags● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 25● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 25 ,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignitionis switched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 13 .● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwise thereis a danger that during a collision, the

24

Airbag system

system may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication offire in the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the ve-hicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehi-cle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even thoughthe accident may cause extensive damage tothe car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag● Knee airbag for the driver.*

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut;● an emergency call is started*.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instrument

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .Have the system checked immediately by a specialisedworkshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Fault in the airbag system.Have the system checked immediately by a specialisedworkshop.

Front passenger front airbag deactivated.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated.The control lamp turns off automatically 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the system »

25

Safety

checked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind youthat the airbag is deactivated. If, with thefront passenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit along with thecontrol lamp on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . Ifthe control lamp is flashing, there is a fault inthe disabling of the airbag system ››› . Havethe system checked immediately by a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-

tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 13 Driver airbag located in steering wheel.

Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag located in dashpanel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in thesteering wheel and that of the front passen-

ger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identifiedby the word “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 13 ››› Fig. 14 .

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not in anycase be occupied by other passenger, petsand objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

26

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front passen-ger front airbag*

Fig. 15 Switch for activating and deactivating thefront passenger airbag.

Fig. 16 Dash panel: control lamp for the deactiva-tion of the front passenger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

CUPRA recommends fitting the child seat inthe rear seat to avoid having to deactivatethe front passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passengerside.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 15. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its positionto (deactivate) or to (activate). If youhave difficulty, ensure that you have insertedthe key as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● When deactivating the airbag, switch theignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the central part ofthe dashboard ››› Fig. 16 .● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the

lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turnsoff.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsiblefor disabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before disa-bling the front passenger airbag! Failure todo so could result in a fault in the airbag de-activation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

27

Safety

Knee airbag*

Fig. 17 On the driver side: location of the kneeairbag

Fig. 18 On the driver side: airbag action radius forthe knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 17 . Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 18 is covered by the knee airbag when

it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

WARNING● The knee airbag is deployed in front ofthe driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-ment areas of the knee airbags free.● Never not fix objects to the cover or inthe deployment area of the knee airbag.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-tween your knees and the location of thethis airbag. If your physical constitutionprevents you from meeting these require-ments, make sure you contact a specialisedworkshop.

Side airbags*

Fig. 19 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 20 Illustration of completely inflated side air-bags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 19.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the sideairbag system provides additional protectionfor the upper body in the event of a severeside collision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reducethe risk of injury to passengers to the areasof the body facing the impact. In addition totheir normal protection, the seat belts alsohold the passengers in the event of a sidecollision; this is how these airbags providemaximum protection.

28

Airbag system

WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system is trig-gered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploymentspace between them and the airbags, or al-low children or other passengers to travel inthis position. It is also important not to at-tach any accessories (such as cup holders)

to the doors. This would impair the protec-tion offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with side air-bags unless the covers have been approvedfor use in your vehicle. Because the airbagdeploys from the side of the backrest, theuse of conventional seat covers would ob-struct the side airbag, seriously reducingthe airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag compo-nents for other repairs (such as removal ofthe front seat) should only be performed bya specialised workshop. Otherwise, faultsmay occur during the airbag system opera-tion.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 21 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 21 and are identified with the text“AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 21 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro-tection airbag is triggered on the impact sideof the vehicle. »

29

Safety

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the head-protectionairbag must be disabled in those vehiclesfitted with a screen dividing the interior ofthe vehicle. See your technical service tomake this adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.

● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should only beperformed by a specialised workshop. Oth-erwise, faults may occur during the airbagsystem operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct op-eration of the side and head-protectionairbags neither the doors nor the door pan-els should be modified in any way (e.g. fit-ting loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the frontdoor must be done in a specialised work-shop.

Transporting children safely

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 18. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children mustalways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

CUPRA recommends securing the childseats shown on the website as described be-low:

30


● Child seats in the opposite direction oftravel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support brack-et (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIXDUO Plus).● Child seats directed towards the front ofthe vehicle (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX(ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S).● Child seats facing in the direction of travel(group 3): with safety belt (ROMER BRITAXKIDFIX2 S).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 32 .

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 22 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 orECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129standards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

CUPRA recommends you use child seatsfrom the Original Accessories Catalogue.These child seats have been designed andtested for use in our vehicles. You can findthe right child seat for your model and agegroup at our dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In thecase of universal approval for ISOFIX, thechild seat is additionally provided with a TopTether belt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements of »

31

Safety

universal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in theECE-R 129 standard in relation to installationand safety. Child seat manufacturers can tellyou which seats have i-Size approval for thisvehicle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 23 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sun visor

Fig. 24 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system.

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fittedto the rear seat behind the front passengerseat so that the child can exit the vehicle onthe pavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.

● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front fac-ing restraint systems, the front backrest mustbe adjusted so that there is no contact withthe child's feet.● For a correct assembly of the child's seaton the rear seats, adjust or dismount theheadrest, in order to prevent contact withthe seat.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment tothe car is through the seat belt and supportbracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in the

32


highest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the frontpassenger front airbagA sticker with important information aboutthe passenger airbag is located on the pas-senger's sun visor and/or on the passengerside door frame ››› Fig. 23 .

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 23 .● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 26.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seatwith such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alterna-tively, the front passenger airbag can be dis-

abled with a key-operated switch ››› page 27 .When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 31.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactivated››› page 27. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag, thevehicle must be taken to a technical serv-ice. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag

when an adult wants to sit in the front pas-senger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other ve-hicle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries to theabdominal and neck areas during a suddenbraking manoeuvre or in an accident.● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 102 .

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats. »

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

33

Safety

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 35 . If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplementedwith a Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system ratherthan attaching them with an automaticthree-point seat belt ››› page 38 .

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchorpoints are located at the back of the rearseat backrest on the boot side ››› page 37 .The rings for retaining the Top Tether beltare marked with an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support brack-et. The support bracket prevents the childseat from tipping forward in the event of im-pact. Child seats fitted with a support brack-et should only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attaching childseatsCUPRA recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

34


Fit a child seat with the ISOFIX / i-Size and Top Tether* system

Fig. 25 Rear seat: ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings. Fig. 26 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISO-FIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear side seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted oneach rear side seat. In some vehicles, the

rings are secured to the seat frame and, inothers, they are secured to the rear floor.The “ISOFIX” rings are located between therear seat backrest and the seat cushioning››› Fig. 25. The Top Tether* rings are locatedon the rear part of the backrests of the rear

seats (behind the seat backrest or in theboot) ››› page 37 .

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the tablebelow.

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

Baby carrierF ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehiclelist into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. »

35

Safety

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment



Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X --- X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X --- X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehiclelist into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the classaccording to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

36


Vehicle i-Size positions



X X i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification.X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” systemYou must follow the child seat manufactur-er's instructions.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISO-FIX/iSize” retaining rings until it is heard toengage securely ››› Fig. 26 . If the child seat isequipped with Top Tether* anchor points,secure it to the correspondent ring››› page 37. Follow the child seat manufac-turer’s instructions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to en-sure that it is properly anchored.

Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Teth-er* attachment system are available fromTechnical Services.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.

● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings – this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 27 Rear seats: adjustment and assembly ac-cording to the Top Tether belt. »

37

Safety

Fig. 28 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether securingrings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facingchild safety seats that have Top Tether.Please carefully read and follow the seatmanufacturer instructions to learn the prop-er way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Place the belt under the head restraint ofthe back seat ››› Fig. 27 (depending on theinstructions of the chair itself, lift or removethe head restraint if necessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 28 .● Firmly tighten the strap following the man-ufacturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufac-turer's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your ve-

hicle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

38


Weight groupFront passenger seata)

Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe information andwarnings concerning the use of child seats››› page 32.

39

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Information, assistance andemergency call service*

How it works

Fig. 29 On the roof console: voice service con-trols

Depending on the equipment, there is acontrol on the roof console.

By pressing the buttons , and ››› Fig. 29, you can run the following voiceservices:

● information call● assistance call● emergency call service.

A built-in control unit establishes the con-nection.

When a voice service is activated, a connec-tion is established with a phone line.

Control lampThe control has a warning lamp ››› Fig. 29(arrow). It shows the following statuses:

● Off: the eCall service is not available.● Flashes red, approx. 20 seconds afterswitching on the ignition: the eCall serviceis off.● Lights up red: system failure. The eCallservice is available with certain restrictions.CUPRA suggests going to a specialised work-shop.● Lights up green: the eCall service is availa-ble. The system works correctly.● Flashes green: There is an ongoing voiceconnection.

Information call1)

With the information call, a call is made toSEAT, S.A. customer service.

Breakdown call1)

With the assistance call you can directly re-quest specialised help in the event of abreakdown.

Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data istransmitted, e.g. your current location.

Emergency call service1)

If an emergency call is conducted manuallyor activated automatically in the event of anaccident with an airbag triggering, informa-tion relevant to the emergency is broadcast,e.g. the current location of the vehicle››› page 323.

If the call is public, the person on the otherend of the line uses the language of thecountry in which you are located.

If the call is private, the person on the otherend of the line will assist you in the languageyou have configured in the Infotainment sys-tem. If the configured language is not availa-ble, English will be used.

Diversion to 112 emergency numberIn some situations where the emergency callservice is limited or cannot be carried out, anemergency call is made to 112.

1) Only available in certain countries.40

Self-help

The following conditions may cause theemergency call service to function in a limi-ted manner or the call to be diverted to the112 emergency number:

● The emergency call is made from an areawith weak or no mobile and GPS signal, aswell as e.g. tunnels, between very tall build-ings, garages, underground walkways, moun-tains and valleys.● In areas with sufficient mobile telephoneand GPS coverage, the mobile telephonenetwork of the telecommunications opera-tor in question may not be available.● In some countries, the emergency callservice may not be available due to legal rea-sons. There is no valid license for the use ofthe emergency call service.● The components of the vehicle requiredfor the emergency phone call are damagedor do not get enough power.● In some countries, the emergency callservice may not be available and dependingon the location of the vehicle, the controllamp LEDs, and even the operation of thedifferent types of calls, could have a specificbehaviour.

NoteBreakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 30 Underneath the floor panel of the luggagecompartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment. To ac-cess the vehicle tools ››› page 132 .

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*Towing eye, removableWheel spanner*Crank handle for jackJack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional ex-tras.

WARNINGWhen the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility setand spare wheel are loose in the interiorthey can be violently thrown in case of asudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-cially in accidents, causing serious injury.● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyremobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-rary spare wheel are safely secured in theluggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

41

Emergencies

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set ifthe vehicle is parked in a safe place, you arefamiliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always switch off the engine, activate theelectronic parking brake and place the se-

lector lever in P to reduce the risk of acci-dental vehicle movement.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteYou can purchase a new bottle of tyre seal-ant in specialised CUPRA dealers or anySEAT dealership.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

42

Self-help

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 31 Standard representation: anti-puncture kitcontents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 31:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressor (depending on the ver-sion, the model may vary).ON/OFF switch

1

2

3

4

5

Air bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at thelower end for a valve insert. The valve insertcan only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 31 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 31 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 31 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 31 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.

6

7

8

9

10

11

● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre.● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 31 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 31 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 31 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 31 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 142 .● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 31 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until itreaches 2.0 to 2.5 bar(29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop »

43

Emergencies

and request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 31 2 to the in-strument cluster, within the driver's visualfield.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 44.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid

overheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 31 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshopwithout exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious injury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surfaceand in a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Move the selector lever to the P position.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 41 andthe spare wheel* ready ››› page 310 .● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

44

Self-help

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 32 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools››› Fig. 30 )over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 32.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lock-ing bolts and is not for use with standardwheel nuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 33 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapt-er.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 33 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 41 ) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 45 .

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from thespecialised CUPRA service or the SEAT Of-ficial Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 34 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 34.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› . »

45

Emergencies

Important information about wheel nutsFactory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel nuts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should noteven use wheel nuts from vehicles of thesame model.

WARNINGIf the wheel nuts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while drivingand cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel nuts which correspond tothe rim in question.● Never use different wheel nuts.● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● The wheel nuts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts orto the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts

have been tightened to the prescribed tor-que, they could come loose while driving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel nuts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel nuts or threadscan be damaged.

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 35 Jack position points.

Fig. 36 Cross member: positioning the jack on thevehicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 35.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 36 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and themobile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheelis slightly lifted off the ground.

46

Self-help

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack* is only designedfor changing wheels on this model. On noaccount attempt to use it for lifting heaviervehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other CUPRAmodels could slip, with the consequent riskof injury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. Ifyou do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on the pointsdesigned for this purpose on the strut. Oth-erwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelnuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rimmay hit and damage the brake disc. For thisreason, please take care and get a secondperson to assist you.

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 47.

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Screw on the wheel nuts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheelnuts use the corresponding adaptor.

● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting sur-faces. These surfaces must be clean beforefitting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nutsThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelnuts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. Af-ter changing a wheel, have the tighteningtorque checked immediately with a torquewrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, haveany rusty wheel nuts that are difficult toscrew replaced and clean the wheel hubthreads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque,they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when »

47

Emergencies

rotating in only one direction. An arrow onthe tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro-tation on tyres with directional tread. Alwaysobserve the indicated direction of rotation inorder to guarantee optimum grip and helpavoid aquaplaning, excessive noise andwear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direc-tion of rotation, drive with extreme caution,as the tyre is no longer being used correctly.This is of particular importance when theroad surface is wet. Change the tyre as soonas possible or remount it with the correct di-rection of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Replace the wheel bolt caps.● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in theluggage compartment ››› page 131 .● Check the tyre pressure of the newlymounted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indi-cator, adjust the pressure and store it inmemory ››› page 308 .● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-

que wrench ››› page 47 . Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Wiper service position

Fig. 37 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 37 .

● Close the bonnet ››› page 287 .● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 120 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

48

Self-help

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 38 Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Fig. 39 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is si-lent. If the graphite layer is damaged, thenoise of the water as it is wiped across thewindscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across the glass,they should be changed if they are damaged,or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availablefrom qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 48 .● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas-tening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.

● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 38 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade● Lift and fold the wiper arm.● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 39 (arrowA ).● Hold down the release button 1 whilegently pulling the blade in the direction of ar-row B .● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 .● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly. »

49

Emergencies

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover,paint thinner or similar products to cleanthe windows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 48 .

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be atleast 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

Jump start: description

Fig. 40 Diagram of connections for vehicles withStart-Stop system.

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .Connect one end of the red jump leadto the positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A .Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in thevehicle providing assistance B .Connect one end of the black jump leadC to a suitable ground terminal, to a

solid piece of metal in the engine block,or to the engine block itself.Connect the other end of the blackjump lead D to a solid metal compo-nent bolted to the engine block or tothe engine block itself of the vehiclewith the flat battery. Do not connect itto a point near the battery.Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

50

Self-help

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again af-ter about 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 287.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery(12V) and approximately the same capacity(see imprint on battery). Failure to complycould result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, battery

9.

10.

11.

acid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emittedfrom the battery could be ignited by sparks.Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 50.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the bat-tery charge status, the drop in voltage maybe so large, even after just a few minutes,that no electrical device in the vehicle maywork e.g. the hazard warning lights. In vehi-cles with the Keyless Access system, thesteering wheel could lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed. »

51

Emergencies

● During towing, never switch off the igni-tion using the start button. Otherwise, theelectronic lock of the steering columncould suddenly become blocked and itwould be impossible to steer the vehicle.This could cause an accident, serious injuryand loss of control of the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:– You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering doesnot operate when the engine is switch-ed off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

– Brake earlier than usual and moresmoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-star-ted. The jump start should be used instead››› page 50.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can theelectronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate cor-rectly.

CAUTIONWhen tow-starting, unburnt fuel could en-ter the catalytic converter and damage it.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started todeactivate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be op-erated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile,

52

Self-help

the hazard warning lights will go off. Whenthe turn signal lever is returned to the restposition, the hazard warning lights will be au-tomatically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steeringis not blocked, and the electronic parkingbrake may be deactivated and the turn sig-nals and wash/wipe operated.● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be tow-ed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. A

tow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre orsimilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-vice, towing with a tow bar is only permittedif it has been specially designed to be instal-led on a tow hitch ››› page 273 .

When the vehicle has to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 53, Cases where towing the vehi-cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad.

● Switch the ignition on.● Move the selector lever to the N››› page 202 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed furtherthan 50 km (30 miles).

● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the ve-hicle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be dam-aged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-mitted● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steer-ing operation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehi-cle:● Observe legal requirements. »

53

Emergencies

● Keep in mind the instructions in the man-ual on towing vehicles.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer.

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column are deactiva-ted. If the vehicle has no power supply orthere is an electric system fault, the enginemust be tow-started ››› page 50 to deacti-vate the electronic parking brake and theelectronic lock of the steering column.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 41 On the right side of the front bumper: re-move the cover.

Fig. 42 On the right side of the front bumper:towline anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is onthe right side of the front bumper behind alid ››› Fig. 41 .

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 52.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 41.● Remove the cover by pressing down on itsbase and leave it hanging from the vehicle››› Fig. 41.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 42 ››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and press until the tabcatches onto the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

54

Self-help

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 43 On the right side of the rear bumper: re-move the cover.

Fig. 44 On the right side of the rear bumper: tow-line anchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is onthe right side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 43.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towingbracket do not have any housing for the

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-led and used for towing ››› page 273 , ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 52.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-out a factory-equipped towing bracket)● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 41.● Press the upper side of the lid ››› Fig. 43 tounclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlockwise››› Fig. 44 ››› . Use a suitable object thatcan completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Insert the upper flange of the lid into theopening of the bumper and press the lowerside of the lid until it is inserted into thebumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION● The towing eye must always be complete-ly and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it couldbe released while towing and tow-starting.● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to tow witha tow bar if this has been specially designedto be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuit-able tow bar is used, both the tow hitch andthe vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a towrope should be used.

55

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electri-cal component can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle’s elec-trical system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 45 Left hand drive vehicles: fuse box coverunder the driver's side dashboard

56

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 46 Glove box (right hand drive): fuse box ac-cess.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel (left-hand drive)● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 45 .● Close: push back the cover it in until itclicks into place.

Fuses behind the glove compartment(right-hand steering wheel)● Open the glove compartment and, if nec-essary, empty it.

● Undo the opening limiter ››› Fig. 46 A intwo steps: first, unlock the limiter by pullingback on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gentlyto the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guidewhen the cover is in the normal opening po-sition (30°).● Free the side pivots B to release the coverto its second opening position (60°).● Follow the same procedure in reverse or-der to return the glove compartment to itsnormal position.

Identifying fuses below below the dash-board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 47 In the engine compartment: fuse box cov-er.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 287 .● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 47 .● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

57

Emergencies

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 48 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 56, ››› page 57 .

Recognise a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 48.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Fuse placement

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

7Air conditioning and heatingcontrol panel, back windowheating, auxiliary heating.

10

8Diagnosis, electronic parkingbrake switch, light switch, revers-ing light, interior lighting, drivingmode, lit-up door sill, rain sensor

7.5

9 Steering column 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

13 Driver and passenger seat beltpre-tensioner 25

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera and surroundingscamera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 30

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

31 Rear lid control unit 30

32 Control unit for parking aid, frontcamera and radar 7.5/10

33 Airbag 7.5

34Reverse switch, climate sensor,electrochromic mirror, rear pow-er sockets (USB)

7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster 7.5

38 Trailer 25

58

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

41 Driver and passenger seat beltpre-tensioner 25

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 40

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

46 USB socket 7.5

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse/Amps

230V rear power sockets 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40/60

3 Engine control unit 15

4 Engine sensors 10

No. Consumers/Amps

5 Engine sensors 10

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 7.5/10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 10

10 Fuel pump control unit 15

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Gearbox pump 30

14 Heated windscreen 50

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15

22 Engine control unit 7.5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 15

36 Left LED headlight 15

No. Consumers/Amps

37 Parking heating 20

38 Right LED headlight 15

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Full-LED headlightsFull-LED headlights handle all light functions(daytime light, side light, turn signal, dippedbeam, fog light and main beam) with lightemitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be »

59

Emergencies

replaced. In case of headlight failure, go toan authorised workshop to have it replaced.

Rear incandescent light bulbs

Type

Turn signal PY21W LL

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

CAUTION● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.● Take good care to avoid damaging anycomponents.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper man-ner.

Note● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.

● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.● Do not touch the glass part of the bulbwith your bare hands, use a cloth or papertowel instead, since the fingerprints left onthe glass will vaporise as a result of the heatgenerated by the bulb, they will be depos-ited on the reflector and will impair its sur-face.

Tail light bulbs located in the body-work

Fig. 49 Luggage compartment: access to the boltsecuring the tail light unit.

Fig. 50 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the lid, levering it with the flat sideof a screwdriver into the recess ››› Fig. 49

1 .

– Remove the bulb connector.

– Unscrew the light securing bolt by hand orusing a screwdriver ››› Fig. 49 2 .

– Remove the light from the body, gentlypulling it toward you, and place on a clean,smooth surface.

– Disassemble the bulb holder unlocking thesecuring tabs ››› Fig. 50 1 .

– Change the damaged bulb.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order,taking special care when fitting the bulbholder. The securing tabs must click intoplace.

60

Fuses and bulbs

CAUTIONTake care when removing the rear light unitto make sure there is no damage to thepaintwork or any of its components.

Note● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit,to avoid any scratches.● In the case of LED lights, change only theturn signal bulb.

Tail lights bulbs located in the rear lid

Fig. 51 Rear lid open: remove the cover.

Fig. 52 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 51 .

– Unlock the securing tabs from the bulbholder ››› Fig. 52 1 or turn the bulb holderto the left 2 and 3 .

– Remove the bulb holder from its location.

– Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder, then turn it to the left and re-move it.

– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it to the right as far as it willgo.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprintsfrom the glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Carry out the same actions in reverse orderfor assembly and pay special attention toplacing the bulb holder, ensuring that thetabs are properly secured.

NoteFor LED pilots, you can only change the re-verse bulb.

61

Emergencies

Changing the number plate bulbs

Fig. 53 In the rear bumper: Number plate light.

Fig. 54 number plate light: remove the bulb hold-er.

Follow the steps indicated:

– Press the number plate light in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 53 .

– Detach the number plate light.

– Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 54 in thedirection of arrow 1 and pull on the con-nector.

– Rotate the bulb holder in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 54 2 and extract it to-gether with the bulb.

– Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.

– Insert the bulb holder into the numberplate light and rotate all the way in the op-posite direction to the arrow ››› Fig. 54 2 .

– Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

– Insert the number plate light carefully intothe opening on the bumper. Ensure thatthe number plate light is in the correct po-sition.

– Insert the number plate light into thebumper until it audibly clicks into place.

NoteDepending on how equipped the vehicle is,the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds thanthat of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, goto an authorised workshop for replace-ment.

Side turn signals

Fig. 55 Turn signal integrated in the rear view mir-ror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the exterior mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have them replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LEDbulbs, the change should be made at a tech-nical service centre.

62

Operation

Fig. 56 Instruments and controls.

64

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handleCentral locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Control for the electric adjustmentof the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Control lever for:– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233– Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 220Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26– On-board computer controls . . . . 80– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialoguesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . 204

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Control lever for:– Windscreen wipers and wash-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . 120– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 118– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308– Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Depending on the equipment,glove compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . 141– CD player* and/or SD card*Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . 27Front passenger seat heating con-trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Automatic air conditioning con-trols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Depending on the equipment:– USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195– Lighter/power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . 142– Connectivity Box/Wireless

Charger* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194– Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 140

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

DSG automatic gearbox lever . . . . . . 202Rotating control (DrivingExperience button) for driving pro-files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Electronic parking brake switch . . . . 244Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . 149Steering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras.● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 64. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

65

Operation

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panelcontrols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the In-fotainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

66

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Digital instrument panel ( Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 57 Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classicview).

Details of the instruments:Engine coolant temperature display››› page 78Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 77 .Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 68SpeedometerDigital speed displayFuel gauge ››› page 77 .Information Profile ››› page 67 .

The Digital Cockpit is a digital instrumentpanel with a high-resolution TFT colourscreen. It has a 4 views accessible using the

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

button of the multifunction steeringwheel. By selecting different informationprofiles, indications other than the classiccircular instruments can be displayed, suchas navigation data, multimedia informationor travel data.

The 4 views are:● Classic● Dynamic● Navigation (without information profiles)● Sport

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation and driving aids.

In the Classic and Navigation views it is pos-sible to customise the information displayedunder Information profiles ››› Fig. 57 8 .

Information profilesThe INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (Infotain-ment button > View > Instrumentcluster) can be used to choose betweenthe different options for viewing informationto be displayed in the Digital Cockpit.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedome-ter needles appear along the entire length››› Fig. 57. »

67

Operation

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap-pears in the Digital Cockpit. Only 2 of theseitems of information can be displayed at thesame time, but the user chooses which todisplay, and in what order, by moving the fin-ger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by exiting the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

● Consumption. Graphic representation ofthe current consumption and digital displayof the average consumption.● Audio. Digital display of the current audioplayback.● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-tude above sea level.● Compass. Digital display of the compass.● Information about the final destination.Digital display of the remaining travellingtime, distance to the destination and the es-timated time of arrival.● Operating range. Digital display of the re-maining range.● Travel time.● Route guidance.

● Journey. Digital display of the distancetravelled.● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-tion of different assistance systems.● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-ted.● Navigation. Graphical representation ofthe navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-ber and the contents of the selectable infor-mation profiles..

Navigation map in the Digital Cockpit*

Depending on the features, the DigitalCockpit can display a detailed map. To dothis, select the Navigation option in themenu menu on the instrument panel››› page 70.

Depending on the equipment, the naviga-tion map can be displayed in the DigitalCockpit or on the Infotainment system or onboth at the same time. If it is displayed onlyon the infotainment system, the DigitalCockpit will only display the direction arrows.

Transfer of navigation mapUsing the map transfer key , the map is trans-ferred from the infotainment system to theDigital Cockpit and vice versa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel, from the Naviga-tion menu, you can transfer the map backto the infotainment system.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument pan-el, depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 76● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature● Indications of the compass

1) Pre-set information depending on the selec-ted “Driving mode”.

68


● Selector lever positions● Gear recommendation (Triptonic mode)››› page 209● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 70● Service interval display ››› page 78● Speed warning ››› page 71● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 200● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-tion system ››› page 74● Driver assistance system display››› page 216● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrumentpanel fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutchgearbox)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is in

the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position,in some cases, the gear engaged in eachcase is shown on the instrument panel dis-play .

Outside temperature indicatorIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lituntil the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when theauxiliary heater is switched on or when driv-ing at very low speeds, the outside tempera-ture indicated may be higher than the actualtemperature due to the heat produced bythe engine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Gear-change recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of cer-tain vehicles may indicate a gear recommen-dation for saving fuel ››› page 209 .

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-ment system or the multifunction steeringwheel ››› page 71 .

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum set speed is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument cluster display››› page 70.

The speed warning can be adjusted in the In-fotainment system, using the infotainmentbutton > SETTINGS > Driver assis-tance ››› page 88 .

Indications of the compassDepending on the equipment, when the ig-nition is on, the instrument panel display in-dicates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on andthere is no route guidance active, the graph-ic representation of a compass is also shown.

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster. »

69

Operation

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature ishigher than freezing temperature, someroads and bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panelsand therefore the versions and instructionson the display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument pan-el screen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove the cause.● If when switching on the ignition warn-ings are shown about existing faults, it

might not be possible to change the set-tings or show the information as described.In this case, go to a specialised workshopand request a repair.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme ormodify additional functions, according tothe vehicle equipment. To do so, CUPRArecommends going to a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 71■ Assist systems.■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 224■ ACC (only display) ››› page 228■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 233■ Travel Assist On/Off ››› page 235■ Side Assist On/Off ››› page 239

■ Navigation.■ Audio.■ Telephone.■ Vehicle status ››› page 72

Service Menu

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuTo open up the Service menu, select theRange information profile while in the Driv-ing data menu, and keep the key press-ed on the multifunction steering wheel forapproximately 4 seconds. When it is re-leased, the Service menu will be displayed.Now you can browse through the menu us-ing the keys on the multifunction steeringwheel as usual.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrumentpanel display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

70


Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunctiondisplay)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to another● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multi-function steering wheel ››› page 80 .

Changing memoryWhile in Travel data > General infor-mation press on the multi-functionsteering wheel to switch between the 3memories1):

Since start: The memory is deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than2 hours.Since refuelling: Display and stor-age of the journey data and the con-sumption values collected. When refu-elling, the memory is deleted.Long-term: This memory containstravel data up to a maximum of 19 hoursand 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-nutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 kmor 9999.9 km. When one of these val-ues is exceeded (varies depending onthe version of the instrument panel),the memory is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Keep the button on the multi-functionsteering wheel pressed for approximately 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Ve-hicle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 84 .

–

–

–

Current consumption: The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100km; and with the engine running andthe vehicle stopped, in litres/hour.Average consumption: The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.Travelling time: This indicates thehours (h) and minutes (min) since theignition was switched on.Range: Approximate distance in kmthat can still be travelled if the samedriving style is maintained.Distance: Distance covered in km (m)after switching on the ignition.Average speed: The average speedwill be shown after driving for approxi-mately 100 metres.Digital speed: Current speed dis-played in digital format.

Setting a speed warning● Select the display Warning at --- km/hor Speed warning at --- mph. »

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

1) This will show all data on the display at thesame time: distance travelled, average con-sumption, average speed and autonomy.

71

Operation

● Press the button on the multi-functionsteering wheel to memorise the currentspeed and activate the warning.● Activate: set the desired speed within 5seconds by rotating the wheel on the multi-function steering wheel. Next, press the button again or wait several seconds. Thespeed is stored and the warning activated.● Deactivate: press the button. The stor-ed speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h(155 mph).

Display Oil temperatureThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is requiredfrom the engine and the outside tempera-ture is high, the engine oil temperature mayincrease. This does not present any problemas long as the warning lamps or ››› page 291 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.

Faults are displayed on the instrument clus-ter display as red and yellow warning symbolsaccompanied with messages and, as appli-cable, even an audible signal ››› page 81 .The representation of the messages andsymbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle statusor Vehicle ››› page 70 .

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possi-ble. If necessary, seek professional assis-tance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes inthe vehicle.

Driver alert system (break recommen-dation)*

Fig. 58 On the instrument panel display: driveralert system symbol.

The Fatigue detection informs the driverwhen their driving behaviour shows signs offatigue.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This isconstantly compared with the current driv-ing behaviour. If the system detects that thedriver is tired, an audible warning is givenwith a sound and an optic warning is shownwith a symbol and complementary messageon the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 58 .The message on the instrument panel dis-play is shown for approximately 5 seconds,

72


and depending on the case, is repeated. Thesystem stores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel dis-play can be switched off by pressing the button on the multi-function steering wheel››› page 80.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 71 .

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offFatigue detection can be activated or deacti-vated in the infotainment system using thefunction button > Driver assistance >Driver Alert System ››› page 88 . A mark in-dicates that the adjustment has been activa-ted.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering● On roads in poor condition● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long pe-riod of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) thesystem automatically re-establishes thetiredness calculation. When driving at a fast-er speed the driving behaviour will be recal-culated.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.

● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 73,System limitations.● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developed fordriving on motorways and well paved roadsonly.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

73

Operation

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 59 On the instrument panel display: examplesof speed limits or overtaking prohibitions with theirrespective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records thestandard traffic signs in front of the vehiclewith a camera located on the base of the in-terior mirror and provides information aboutspeed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displaysadditional signals, such as time-specific pro-hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers››› page 273 or limitations that only apply inthe event of rain. Even on journeys withoutsigns, the system may display any applicablespeed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Shown on the displayIn Germany, on motorways and vehicleroads, besides speed limits and overtakingprovisions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 59 and, depending on the navigationsystem fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 84 .

Road sign detection system messages:There are no traffic signs available● The system is in its start-up phase.● OR: the camera has not recognized anymandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable● The speed warning function of the roadsign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: pleaseclean the windscreen.● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currentlyrestricted.● The navigation system is not transmittingdata. Check if the navigation system has up-dated maps.● OR: the vehicle is in a region not includedon the navigation system's map.

No data available● The traffic sign detection system does notwork in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis-play on the instrument panelThe permanent traffic sign view on the in-strument cluster can be switched on or off in

1) System available depending on the country.74


the infotainment system using the button > SETTINGS > Driver assistance.

Display of traffic signsWhen the traffic sign detection system isconnected, a camera located on the base ofthe interior rear-view mirror records the traf-fic signs in front of the vehicle. After check-ing and evaluating the information from thecamera, the navigation system and the cur-rent vehicle data, up to three valid trafficsigns are displayed ››› Fig. 59 B in conjunc-tion with their corresponding additionalsigns.

The sign that is currently valid for thedriver is shown in the left side of thescreen For example, a maximum speedlimit of 130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 59 A.

A sign valid only in certain circum-stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shownsecond, together with the additionalrain sign.

If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signalwith the additional rain sign will beshown first, on the left, as it is the onethat is applicable at the time.

A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.No overtaking at certain times, will bedisplayed third ››› Fig. 59 C.

First:

Second:

Additional sign:

Third:

Speed warningIf the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a message onthe dash panel display.

The speed warning can be set or completelyswitched off in the infotainment system usingthe button > SETTINGS > Driver as-sistance ››› page 84 . The speed is adjus-ted in steps of 5 km/h (3 mph) within a rangeof between 0 km/h (mph) and 20 km/h(12 mph) above the maximum speed permit-ted.

Trailer modeIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it ispossible to activate or deactivate the displayof specific traffic signs for vehicles with trail-er, such as speed limits or overtaking prohib-itions. It is switched on or off in the infotain-ment system, using the button > SET-TINGS > Driver assistance ››› page 84 .

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legalprovisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to aspeed greater than that which is permitted inthe country in question for driving with a

trailer, the system automatically displays theusual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limits asif there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operationThe traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.● When driving at high speeds.● If the camera is covered or dirty.● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other ve-hicles.● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations.● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns.● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variabletraffic signs or other lighting units). »

75

Operation

● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

WARNINGThe technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposedby the laws of physics and only works withinthe system's limits. Do not let the extraconvenience afforded by the traffic signdetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain andfog may lead to the system failing to displaytraffic signs or not displaying them correct-ly.● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation may beimpaired.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the traffic sign detec-tion system may differ from the actual cur-rent traffic situation.● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.

● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

WARNINGIf messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● Never ignore the messages displayed.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

NoteTo avoid affecting the correct operation ofthe system, take the following points intoconsideration:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the cam-era's field of vision.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.

● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.● Failure to heed the control lamps andcorresponding text messages when theylight up may result in damage to the vehi-cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press the infotainment button.● Press the function button SETTINGS>Date and time to set the time ››› page 84 .

Adjusting the time in the Digital Cockpit● In the Driving data menu, select theRange function (infotainment button >View > Driving data > Range).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 70.● Select the menu Time.● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

76


Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator,the rev counter offers you the possibility ofusing the engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the enginehot. However, it is advisable to move the se-lector lever to D or lift your foot off the ac-celerator before the needle reaches the redzone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 209, Selecting theoptimal gear.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 60 Fuel gauge.

Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, the low-er diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have theopportunity.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flashesred.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 327 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly orswitches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehi-cle to stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towards »

77

Operation

the side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

Engine coolant temperature indica-tor.

Fig. 61 Engine coolant temperature indicator.

››› Fig. 61:Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid highengine speeds and stressing the engine ifit has not reached operating tempera-ture.Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine workhard, the diodes may continue lightingup and reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up

A

B

Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 293.● If the warning lamp does not switch offeven if the coolant level is correct, requestassistance from specialised personnel.

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature.

C If necessary, use the engine oil tempera-ture* ››› page 72 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehi-cle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged thiscan reduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek special-ist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval display appears on theinstrument cluster screen and in the info-tainment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

CUPRA distinguishes between services withengine oil change (e.g. Oil change service)and services without engine oil change (e.g.Inspection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

78


In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by CUPRA, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of useand individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles)and the time is given in complete days. Thecurrent service message cannot be vieweduntil 500 km after the last service. Prior tothis, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-

strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Please have your vehicle inspec-ted.● Oil change service due!● Oil change service and inspectiondue!

Consult a service notificationWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press the infotainment button.● Press the SETTINGS function button››› page 84.● Select the Service menu option to displayinformation about the services.

Checking the date on the digital instrumentpanel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 70 .

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a speci-alised CUPRA dealer or any dealer in the

SEAT network, the display can be reset asfollows:

● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 70 .

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually,the service interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen the button is pressed on the multi-function steering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mindthe maximum service intervals permitted››› page 312.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by an authoriseddealer.

79

Operation

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

The multifunction display can only be con-trolled from the buttons on the multi-func-tion steering wheel.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation using the multifunctionsteering wheel

Fig. 62 Right side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and information dis-plays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 72 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› Fig. 62 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 62 ; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 62.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 62 or wait

a few seconds until the menu or the informa-tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel ››› Fig. 62 until the desired option ofthe menu is highlighted. The option appearsframed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 62 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or .

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

80


Button for the driver assistance sys-tems*

Fig. 63 On the turn signal and main beam lever:button for driver assistance systems (dependingon versions).

Fig. 64 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: button for driver assistance systems (de-pending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam head-light lever button, you can activate or deacti-

vate the driver assistance systems displayedin the Assistance systems menu .

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the turn signal leverand main beam headlight● Briefly press the ››› Fig. 63 1 button toopen the Assistants menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 80 . A mark in-dicates that driver assistance system isswitched on.● Next, confirm the selection by pressingthe button on the multi-function steeringwheel.

Activating or deactivating a driver assis-tance system using the multifunctionsteering wheel*● Press the button ››› Fig. 64 to open theAids menu.● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it. A mark indicates thatdriver assistance system is switched on.● Next, confirm the selection by pressingthe button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

The driver assistance systems can also beswitched on and off in the infotainment sys-tem, in the menu Vehicle settings››› page 88.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switchoff when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 66, Instrument panel .

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 244 .

Fault in the brake system ››› page 244 .

Fault in the steering system ››› page 211 . »

81

Operation

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 16 .

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 78 .

Engine oil pressure ››› page 291 .

Alternator abnormality ››› page 298 .

Press the foot brake ››› page 228 .

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 244 .

Fault in the ESC or the system caused it toswitch off; OR ESC or ASR operating››› page 248.

ESC switched off manually; OR ESC in Sportmode ››› page 248 .

Fault in the ABS ››› page 248 .

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 112 .

Fault in the emission control system››› page 286.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 286.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 286 .

Fault in the steering system ››› page 211 .

Tyre pressure monitor system ››› page 308 .

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 77 .

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tension-ers ››› page 25 .

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 25 .

The front passenger front airbag is activated››› page 25.

Defective active cruise control (ACC)››› page 232

Lane Assist (lane keeping system)››› page 234.

Error in the lane assist warning system››› page 234.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 112.

Low engine oil level ››› page 291 .

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 208 .

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low››› page 120.

Green indicator lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 112.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 112 .

Auto Hold activated ››› page 247 .

Press the foot brake ››› page 202 .

Cruise control system (GRA) ››› page 220 ;OR speed limiter ››› page 222

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) ››› page 229 .

Lane assist active (Lane Assist) warning››› page 234.

Blue indicator lamps

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 112 .

Other warning lamps

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 69 .

Main beam assist (Light Assist) ››› page 112 .

Hill descent control (HDC) ››› page 209 .

Service interval display ››› page 78 .

Mobile phone connected by Bluetooth® .

Mobile telephone battery charge status.

82


Risk of freezing ››› page 69 .

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 200 .

Start-Stop system unavailable ››› page 200 .

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seriousinjuries may occur.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch offthe engine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartmentis a hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 287 .

83

Operation

Infotainment system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im-portant vehicle functions and systems into asingle central control unit, e.g. air condition-ing, menu settings, radio equipment and thenavigation system.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

General operating informationGeneral information on the operation of theinfotainment system, as well as on the warn-ing and safety instructions that must be tak-en into account, is found in ››› page 152 .

How to move through the different menusand select them● Switch the ignition on.● If the infotainment system is off, switch iton.● The different menus are selected directlyon the touch screen using texts, icons orbuttons.

If the box is checked , the function is acti-vated.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

Scroll bar: Some menus and functions showmore content above or below those dis-played on the screen at that time, for exam-

ple, long lists of settings. Press on the scrollbar and pull up or down.

TutorialThe first time you connect the Infotainmentsystem, a system tutorial will open with abrief description of the main functions andhow to use it.

HelpIn the Help menu can be found more infor-mation and tips for using the infotainmentsystem.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the Info-tainment system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

84


Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 65 Schematic representation: Overview of thepossible function buttons on the screen

Top part of the screenCurrent timeDriving profile and navigation informa-tion. If the user has an active route, boththe time and the distance to the destina-tion are displayed. If there is no activeroute, the driving profile is displayed. Onvehicles with no available driving profile,the current address is displayed whenev-er there is no active route.Air conditioning information. In vehi-cles with heated steering wheels or wind-screen heating, the corresponding icon

A

B

C

is displayed when these functions areenabled. If not, the current outside tem-perature is displayed.Telephone information. Information re-garding your mobile device is displayed:available network signal strength, estab-lished Bluetooth connection, unan-swered calls, new messages, battery sta-tus, etc.Number of notifications and customi-zation of the system depending on theuser and connectivity.

D

E

Bottom part of the screenMain menu display mode:: main menu with the 6 main functionsdivided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisa-ble by the user by pressing on the func-tion).: main menu in mosaic mode (all func-tions of the Infotainment system)Direct accesses to the functions of theInfotainment system (up to 10 functions,5 + 5, customisable by the user). Bypressing on the icon, you can select/de-select the functions in question.

F

G

85

Operation

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 66 Schematic representation: Initial configurationwizard

The initial configuration wizard will help youto set up your Infotainment system the firsttime you switch it on.

Whenever you switch on the infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will be dis-played ››› Fig. 66 if any parameters have notbeen set (marked with “”) or if the Don'tshow again function button has not beenpressed.

Function button: Function

Closes the Configuration Wizard.


A Press to set day and time.

BPress to search and store to memorythe radio stations that have the bestreception at that moment.

C Press to link your mobile phone to theInfotainment system.

DPress to select your home address us-ing your current position or by man-ually entering an address.


Don't showagain

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. If you wish to perform the initialconfiguration, you must accessthrough Help.

Start Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

EndOnce one or more settings have beenapplied, press to finalise the setup inthe main menu of the wizard.

86


Vehicle information

Fig. 67 Schematic representation: Vehicle informationand status

Pressing on > Selection and then on Vehicle info opens the Vehicle informationmenu with the following submenus:

Driving data. The average consump-tion, average speed, distance travelled,trip duration and autonomy are shown.It has 3 memories: “From departure”,“Total calculation” and “From refuelling”››› page 71.Vehicle status. The warnings regardingfaults, incidents, memorisation of thetyre pressure or information of the nextinspection service are displayed.

–

–

87

Operation

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 68 Schematic representation: Assist systems andvehicle settings

The number of assist systems and settingsdepend on the version and the country inquestion.■ Driver assistance■ Automatic parking brake activation

››› page 246.■ Park assist ››› page 252 .■ Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation

systems and brake assist ››› page 248 .■ Activate / deactivate the Start-Stop sys-

tem ››› page 200 .■ Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

››› page 228.■ Lane Assist (lane keeping system)

››› page 233.

■ Emergency brake assistance system(Front Assist) ››› page 224 .

■ Fatigue detection ››› page 72 .■ Traffic sign recognition ››› page 74 .■ Lane assist ››› page 239 .■ Emergency Assist ››› page 238 .

88


Multifunction steering wheel*

Functions

Fig. 69 Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 70 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunctionmodules from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone, navigation, voice con-trol and assist functions without the driverneeding to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

Symbol Function

1 Turn: Turn volume up/downPress: Mute volume

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panelmenu. In Navigation mode, turn tozoom in/out of the map in the DigitalCockpitPress: Select the highlighted option inthe instrument panel

Radio: Search for the previous/nextstation.Media: Short press: previous/nexttrack; long press: fast forward/rewind

Activate phone menu (answer call, endcall)

Switch between media and radio sour-ces

Change the instrument panel menu(previous/next)

Enable/disable voice control

Digital Cockpit: Change digital panelviews ››› page 67

Activate or deactivate steering wheelheating ››› page 150

Symbol Function

Connect/disconnect the Cruise con-trol system ››› page 220 / ACC››› page 228 / Speed limiter››› page 222

: Activate ACC / Cruise control sys-tem / Limiter: Reset programmed ACC speed orcruise control system

: Increase programmed speed: Decrease programmed speed

Open the drive assist menu in the in-strument panel

Modify the programmed ACC distance

Driving profile selection ››› page 211

STARTENGINE

STOP

Starting and stopping the engine››› page 196

89

Operation

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 71 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Key to ››› Fig. 71Unlock the vehicleLock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Folding the key shaft in and out

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 92 .

1

2

3

4

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the ve-hicle. The range of the vehicle key with re-mote control and new battery is several me-tres around the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehi-cle using the remote control key, this shouldbe re-synchronised ››› page 92 or the bat-tery changed ››› page 91 .

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 71 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held downfor a longer period the control lamp flashesseveral times, such as in convenience open-ing.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 91 .

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehi-cle electronic immobiliser. A vehicle key willnot work if it does not contain a microchip orthe microchip has not been encoded. This is

also true for keys which are specially cut forthe vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a specialised CUPRA dealer orSEAT Official Service, a specialised workshopor an approved key service qualified to cre-ate this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 92 .

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key couldstart the engine or activate any electricequipment (e.g. electric windows), causingrisk of accident. The doors can be lockedusing the remote control key. This couldbecome an obstacle for assistance in anemergency situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when you leavethe vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

90

Opening and closing

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It isalso possible even when you are outside theradius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to the ve-hicle working in the same range of frequen-cies, for example, radio transmitters or mo-bile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 94 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brieflydisconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are available atyour Technical Service, where they must bematched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

To change the battery

Fig. 72 Vehicle key: opening the battery compart-ment cover.

Fig. 73 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

CUPRA recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 90 .● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 72 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 73 .● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 73 , pressing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow ››› .● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 72 , pressingit onto the vehicle key casing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

WARNINGSwallowing a battery with a 20 mm diame-ter or any other button battery can causeserious and even fatal injuries within a veryshort time.● Keep the vehicle key and key fobs withbatteries out of reach of children.● If you suspect that someone may haveswallowed a battery, seek immediate medi-cal attention.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always »

91

Operation

replace the dead battery with another ofthe same voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlockedusing the key. In this case, the key must beresynchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 90 .● If necessary, remove the cover from thedriver door lever ››› page 101 .● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.● If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut.If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system, it may only be lockedwith the ignition off and the driver's doorclosed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parkedfor a long period (e.g. in a private garage)may run down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individualfrom opening the doors and accessing thevehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergencyor accident, locked doors will complicateaccess to the vehicle interior to help thepassengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked

in the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 94.● From outside with the Keyless Access››› page 95 system,● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 94 .

Various functions are available to improvethe vehicle safety:

● Security system “Safe” ››› page 98● Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlocking● Selective unlocking system

92

Opening and closing

● Automatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system (Auto Lock)● Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents theunintentional unlocking of the vehicle. If thevehicle is unlocked and none of the doors(including the boot) are opened within 30seconds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock onlythe driver door, or all the vehicle doors. Toselect the required option, use the Infotain-ment system setting ››› page 93 .

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds aspeed of about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents youfrom being locked out of the vehicle in thefollowing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-not be locked with the central locking switch››› page 94.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a special-ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT Official Service orspecialised workshop.

● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed inthe Infotainment system.

Unlocking doors● Press the function button > SETTINGS> Opening and closing > Centrallocking > Door unlocking.

You can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock thevehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap isalso unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once,only the driver door is unlocked. If that but-ton is pressed twice, the rest of the doorsand the rear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

93

Operation

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 74 Remote control key: buttons.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 74 button.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the button.● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply ifyou press the button for at least one sec-ond.

Selective unlocking systemThe selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:● Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in the open-ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously:● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn thekey twice within 5 seconds in the opening di-rection.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theftalarm* deactivate immediately when onlythe driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Infotainment system, you canprogramme the security central locking sys-tem directly ››› page 93 .

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Lock-ing system “Safe” on page 98.

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.

● Other functions of the remote controlkey ››› page 108, Convenience open/closefunction.

Unlocking and locking from the inside

Fig. 75 Driver's door: central locking switch.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 75 button.● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 75 button.

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.

94

Opening and closing

● In the event of an accident in which theairbags inflate, doors locked from the insidewill be automatically unlocked to facilitateaccess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance in anemergency. Do not leave anyone, especial-ly children, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 92 . You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

Unlock and lock the vehicle withKeyless Access*

Fig. 76 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 77 Door handle: sensor surfaces

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle key

in the detection area where you are attempt-ing to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 76 and totouch one of the sensor surfaces on thedoor handles ››› Fig. 77 or operate the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid››› page 103 ››› .

Automatic vehicle unlockThe vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further thanapprox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-sponding door or the entire vehicle. Thenecessary adjustments can be performed invehicles with a driver information system››› page 88.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car,››› Fig. 76 the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon asone of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is touched or the softtouch/handle onthe rear lid is operated. »

95

Operation

The following features are then availablewithout having to use the vehicle key active-ly:

● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.● Easy Open: opening the rear lid movingone foot below the rear bumper››› page 105.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 196 .

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; lockingby a single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside,the vehicle will not lock immediately. All thevehicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail toopen any door or boot hatch.

Unlocking and opening the doors(Keyless-Entry)● Grip one of the front door handles. Whenyou do this, you touch the sensor surface››› Fig. 77 A (arrow) of the handle and thevehicle unlocks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) on one of the front doorhandles. The door that is used must beclosed.

In vehicles with the “Safe” security system:closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.

● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 77B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the “Safe” securitysystem ››› page 98 . The door that is usedmust be closed.● Touch (twice) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 77B (arrow) of one of the front door handles

to lock the vehicle without activating the“Safelock” security system ››› page 98 .

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity zone››› Fig. 76.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically.If the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rearlid will not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a secondvehicle key, the key inside the vehicle isblocked for engine ignition ››› page 196 . Inorder to enable engine ignition, press the button on the key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors on

96

Opening and closing

the passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the doorhandles is often activated in an unusual man-ner with the vehicle locked (e.g. by thebranches of a bush rubbing against it), allproximity sensors are disabled for a certainperiod of time.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's KeylessAccess unlocking for one locking and un-locking cycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P sinceotherwise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on theremote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 77 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also

possible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deac-tivated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pullon the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows and thesunroof using the comfort function, keep afinger for a few seconds on the locking sen-sor surface ››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) of the doorhandle until the windows and roof haveclosed.

How the doors open when touching thesensor surface on the door handle will de-pend on the settings that have been activa-ted in the infotainment system, using thebutton > SETTINGS > Opening andclosing.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehicle keyin the proximity. If at least one of the elec-tric windows is open and the sensor surface››› Fig. 77 B (arrow) on one of the handles is

activated continuously, all windows willclose.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehiclecan be unlocked or locked manually››› page 101.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. To do so,CUPRA recommends going to a specialisedCUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the ex-terior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver and passenger door handles››› page 122.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g. »

97

Operation

from a mobile device accessory) or if thekey is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● The vehicle can only be locked if the se-lector lever is in the P position.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote con-trol does not detect movement for a cer-tain length of time, the system will con-clude that the vehicle cannot be opened(e.g. on a night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system “Safe”1)

When the vehicle is blocked, the “Safe” se-curity system puts the door handles out ofoperation and prevents unauthorised per-sons for entering. The doors cannot beopened from inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switchingthe ignition off, a warning may be displayedon the control panel screen stating that the“Safe” security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.● OR: touch the sensor surface on the out-side of the door handle twice ››› Fig. 77 B.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be unlocked and openedfrom the inside using an door handle.● The anti-theft alarm is activated.● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” statusThe flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequencefor a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children) inthe vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficultto break into the vehicle or steal it. The sys-tem will initiate acoustic and optical warningsignals when your vehicle is tried to beforced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.The system is immediately activated and theturn signal light located on the driver doorwill flash along with the turn signals, indicat-ing that the alarm and the locking securitysystem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are

1) Available depending on market and version.98

Opening and closing

subsequently closed, they will be automati-cally included in the protection areas of thevehicle and the turn signals will flash accord-ingly when the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggeredfor about 30 seconds alongside a sound andoptical (flashing) warning signals and will berepeated about ten times when the vehicle islocked and the following unauthorised ac-tions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switch-ing on the ignition in the next 15 seconds (incertain markets, such as the Netherlands,there is no 15 second waiting time and thealarm is activated immediately on openingthe door).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with anon-authorised key.● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.

● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 100 ).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 100 ).● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 100 ).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 100 ).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key.● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanicallyusing the key, the ignition must be turned onwithin 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTIONIf the anti-theft security system is switchedoff, the vehicle interior monitoring and thetow-away protection are automatically dis-connected.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery fromexhausting if the vehicle has been leftparked for a long period of time. The alarmsystem remains activated.● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within us-ing the central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechani-cally with the key, only the driver door isunlocked, the rest of the doors remainlocked. Only when the ignition has beenturned on will the other doors be available -but not unlocked - and the central lockingbutton will be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

99

Operation

Interior monitoring and the anti-towsystem*

It is a monitoring or control function incor-porated in the anti-theft alarm* which de-tects unauthorised vehicle entry by means ofultrasound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 98 isswitched off, the vehicle interior monitoringand the tow-away protection are automati-cally disconnected.

Activation● It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button on theremote control. The time period from whenthe door is opened until the ignition isturned on should not exceed 15 seconds,otherwise the alarm will be triggered.● Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensorswill be deactivated. The alarm system re-mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it mustbe done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

Deactivation through the infotainmentsystem● Turn off the ignition and select: button >SETTINGS > Opening and closing >Central locking > Interior monitor-ing.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehi-cle interior monitoring and the tow-awayprotection are switched off until the nexttime the door is opened.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correct-ly if the vehicle is completely closed. Pleaseobserve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partiallyor completely).● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging fromthe rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle inte-rior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activated

100

Opening and closing

once all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.

● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way.

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking ofthe driver’s door

Fig. 78 Driver door handle: Concealed lock cylin-der.

Fig. 79 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail tooperate, the driver door can still be lockedand unlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 98.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 90 .● Insert the key shaft into the lower openingin the cover on the driver door handle››› Fig. 79 then remove the cover upwards.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinderto unlock or lock the vehicle. »

101

Operation

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 98 .● After the driver door is opened, you have15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Oncethis time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic im-mobilizer recognises a valid vehicle key anddeactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using the keyshaft ››› page 92 .

Emergency lock of doors without lockcylinders

Fig. 80 Locking the door manually.

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the frontof the front passenger's door and the reardoors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn itto the right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can nolonger be opened from the outside. Pull theinterior door handle once to unlock andopen the door.

Childproof locks

Fig. 81 Childproof lock on the left hand side door.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a dooraccidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 81 andanti-clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove inthe door using the ignition key, anti-clock-wise for the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 81and clockwise for the right hand sidedoors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

102

Opening and closing

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened whenthe reverse or rear fog lights are lit. Thismay damage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.● Closing the rear lid without observing andensuring it is clear could cause serious in-jury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on the

time of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga-rage.

NoteBefore closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 82 Rear lid: handle

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by exerting slight pressureon the handle ››› Fig. 82 .

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● To open: place slight pressure on the han-dle. The rear lid opens automatically.● To close: hold one of the handles on theinner trim and close it by moving it down-wards, or press the button on the rear lid*››› Fig. 83.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is alsolocked.

103

Operation

Rear lid with electric opening andclosing*

Fig. 83 Rear lid: button to close the rear lid.

Fig. 84 Centre console: button to open and closethe rear lid.

Opening the rear lid● Unlock the vehicle ››› page 92 and brieflypress the handle of the rear lid. On vehicleswith Keyless Access you can directly pressthe handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is un-

locked if an authorised key is recognised inthe proximity of the vehicle.● OR: press the button on the centre con-sole for at least one second ››› Fig. 84 . Thebutton also works when the ignition isswitched off.● OR: press and hold the button of thevehicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehi-cle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (thedoors remain locked).● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access andsensor-controlled opening you can open therear lid by moving one foot in the area of thesensors located below the rear bumper (EasyOpen ››› page 105 ). The rear lid will be auto-matically opened.

Closing the rear lid● Briefly press the button on the rear lid››› Fig. 83 ››› in Introduction on page 103.● OR:press the button located on thecentre console until the rear lid is closed››› Fig. 84.● OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, pressand hold the vehicle key button until therear lid is closed, or move one foot into thearea of the sensors located below the rearbumper (Easy Open) ››› page 105 . The keyof the vehicle must not be further away than1.5 m from the boot or inside the vehicle.

● OR: manually move the rear lid in the di-rection of closing until it closes automatical-ly.● The rear lid goes down automatically to thefinal position and also closes automatically››› in Introduction on page 103.

Interrupting opening or closingAfter beginning to open or close the rear lid,the action can be halted by pressing one ofthe buttons.

Continue opening or closing the rear lid byhand. To do this, some force will have to beused.

If you press one of the buttons again, therear lid will move again in the original direc-tion.

If the rear lid is met with resistance or an ob-stacle during the automatic opening or clos-ing, opening or closing will be interruptedimmediately. For the closing process, therear lid opens again slightly.

● Check why it has not been possible toopen or close the rear lid.● Try to open or close the rear lid again.● If necessary, the rear lid can be opened orclosed by hand using reasonable force.

104

Opening and closing

Particular features if towing a trailerIf the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri-cally connected to a trailer ››› page 273 , theelectric rear lid can only be opened or closedwith the buttons on the rear lid itself.

Acoustic warningsThroughout the process of opening or clos-ing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can beheard. Exception: when the rear lid isopened manually using the handle or theEasy Open function with the movement ofthe foot or closed using the button on therear lid itself ››› Fig. 83 .

Modifying and memorising the openingangleIf the space behind or above the vehicle isless than the travel area of the rear lid, youcan change the opening angle of the rear lid.

To memorise a new opening angle, the rearlid must be open at least halfway.

● Interrupt the opening process in the de-sired position.● Press the button ››› Fig. 83 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.

The opening angle is memorised. Memorisa-tion is indicated by blinking of the hazardwarning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the openingangleFor the rear lid to reopen completely, theopening angle must be reset and memorisedagain.

● Release the rear lid and open it to thememorised height.● Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. Todo this, some force will have to be used.● Press the button ››› Fig. 83 on the rearlid for at least 3 seconds.● This resets and memorises the factory-setopening angle. Memorisation is indicated byblinking of the hazard warning lights and anaudible warning.

Automatic protection against overheatingIf the system is operated repeatedly in ashort space of time, it automatically switchesoff to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the functioncan be reused. Until then, the rear lid canonly be opened and closed by hand usingreasonable force.

If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery isdisconnected ››› page 297 or the corre-sponding fuse burns out ››› page 56 , the sys-tem will have to be reset. This requires clos-ing the rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking

››› page 107

WARNINGIf a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or itis heavily loaded, the rear lid may not openor, after opening, it may lower by itself dueto the extra weight and cause serious in-jury.● Do not open the rear lid when there is alot of snow on it or when carrying a load(e.g. on a rack).● Before opening the rear lid, remove thesnow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled open-ing and closing (Easy Open)

Fig. 85 Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening(Easy Open). »

105

Operation

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock andopen or close it moving one foot in the areaof the sensors located under the rear bump-er.

● Switch the ignition off.● Stand in front of the rear bumper, in themiddle.● With a brisk movement, bring your footand lower leg as close as you can to thebumper. The lower part of the leg needs tobe close to the upper sensor area and yourfoot must be close to the lower sensor area››› Fig. 85 1 .● Quickly remove your foot and lower legfrom the sensor areas ››› Fig. 85 2 . The rearlid will be automatically opened.● If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the pro-cedure after a few seconds.

The third brake light flashes once to showthe boot has opened with the Easy Openfunction.

The rear lid can be closed with another footmovement similar to the opening one (provi-ded a valid vehicle key is in the proximity ofthe rear lid).

When closed, the rear lid automatically locksif the vehicle has been locked beforehandand there is no valid key inside.

While the rear lid is in motion (either open-ing or closing), it can be stopped with anoth-er foot movement similar to the opening one(provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximi-ty of the rear lid).

The Easy Open feature is not available or on-ly has limited availability in the following sit-uations (examples):

● If the rear bumper is very dirty.● If the rear bumper is wet with salt water,e.g. after having driven on gritted roads.● If the electrical unlocking tow hitch is notcovered.● If the vehicle has been equipped at a latertime with a tow bracket.

In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Openfeature may take a little longer to open theboot or may deactivate automatically, toavoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. be-cause of the running water.

The Easy Open function can be connectedand disconnected permanently in the info-tainment system using the button > SET-TINGS > Opening and closing››› page 88.

WARNINGIf there is a valid key in the proximity of therear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func-tion may be accidentally activated and the

rear lid will open, for example, whensweeping under the rear bumper, when di-recting a water jet or high pressure steam tothe area or when carrying out maintenancework or repairs in that area. If accidentallyopened, the rear lid could injure somebodysituated in its area of operation or causematerial damage.● Therefore, always make sure that there isno unsupervised valid key in the area nearthe rear lid.● Before carrying out any maintenance orrepair work on the vehicle, always disablethe Easy Open feature via the infotainmentsystem.● Before washing the vehicle, always disa-ble the Easy Open feature via the infotain-ment system.● Before attaching a bicycle rack or a trail-er, ››› page 273 , always disable the EasyOpen feature via the infotainment system.

106

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 86 Detail of the luggage compartment: ac-cess to emergency unlocking.

Fig. 87 Detail of the luggage compartment: emer-gency unlocking

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside inthe event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartment● Remove the cover using the key blade as alever ››› Fig. 86 .● Insert the key blade into the slot and movethe key in the direction of the arrow until thelock unlocks ››› Fig. 87 .

Window controls

Electrically opening and closing thewindows

Fig. 88 Detail of the driver's door: window con-trols.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door have been opened.

Safety switch *The safety control ››› Fig. 88 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off. »

1

2

3

4

5

107

Operation

Convenience open/close functionThe electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:● Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* have reached the desired position.● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key and thenkeep the key in the driver door lock until allthe windows and the sunroof* have reachedthe required position.

Convenience closing:● Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* are closed ››› .● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the"lock" position until all the windows and thesunroof* are closed.

During convenience closing, first the win-dows and then the sliding sunroof will beclosed.

In the infotainment system different settingscan be adjusted using the function button > SETTINGS > Opening and closing >Windows > Convenience opening.

One-touch opening and closingThe one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to holdthe button of the corresponding electricwindow.

For the automatic raising function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pullthe button for the corresponding windowupwards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull onthe button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several at atime.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 101.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergency sit-uation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to disa-ble the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

108

Opening and closing

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 109. If this happens, check why thewindow could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does notclose before attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic clos-ing will stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the win-dow will stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.

● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Elec-trically opening and closing the windows onpage 108.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. Therear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It al-so has a sun blind.

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.

● Open or close the sunroof and the sunblind only when no one is in their path ofmovement.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.● Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle, especial-ly if they have access to the vehicle key. Ifusing they key unattended, they could lockthe vehicle, start the engine, switch on theignition and activate the sunroof.● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a shortspace of time provided that neither thedriver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION● To prevent damage, during winter tem-peratures remove any ice or snow thatmight be on the car roof before openingthe sunroof or adjusting the tilt position.● Before leaving the vehicle or in case ofrainfall, always close the sunroof. With thesunroof open or in a tilted position, watercan enter the interior and can cause con-siderable damage to the electrical system.As a result, other damage can occur in thevehicle.

Note● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-cumulate on the sunroof rails should be »

109

Operation

regularly cleaned away either by hand orwith a vacuum.● If the sunroof does not work correctly,the anti-trap function will not work either.Contact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 89 On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.

The sun blind automatically opens along withthe sunroof if completely closed or if in frontof the sunroof. The sun blind remains in theprevious position and does not automaticallyclose with the sunroof. The sun blind can on-ly be closed completely once the sunroofhas been closed.

The button ››› Fig. 89 has two levels. Thefirst level switches the sunroof to the tiltedposition, opening or closing it fully or partial-ly.

On the second level, the sunroof automati-cally moves to the corresponding final posi-tion after briefly pressing the button. Activat-ing the button again stops the automaticfunction.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof● Press the rear part of the button B to thefirst level.● Automatic function: briefly press the rearpart of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position● Press the front part of the button A to thefirst level.● Automatic function: briefly press the frontpart of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by ad-justing the tilted position of the sunroof orby closing the sunroof● Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof● Press button C backwards to the first level.● Automatic function to the comfort posi-tion: briefly press button C backwards to thesecond level.

Closing the sunroof● Press button D forwards to the first level.

● Automatic function: briefly press button Dforwards to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation duringthe opening or closing● Press button C or D again.

Opening and closing the sunshadeblind

Fig. 90 On the interior roof lining: sunshade blindbuttons.

The electrical sun blind works when the igni-tion is switched on.

When the sunroof is in its most tilted posi-tion, the sun blind automatically goes into aventilation position. The sun blind remains inthis position also with the sunroof closed.

110

Opening and closing

Buttons ››› Fig. 90 1 and 2 have two levels.The first level opens or closes the sun blindfully or partially.

By briefly pressing the button to the secondlevel, the sun blind automatically moves tothe corresponding final position. Activatingthe button again stops the automatic func-tion.

Once the ignition has been switched off, youcan still open or close the sun blind for a fewminutes provided the driver door and thefront passenger door are not opened.

Opening the sun blind● Press button 1 to the first level.● Automatic function: briefly press button 1to the second level.

Closing the sun blind● Press button 2 to the first level.● Automatic function: briefly press button 2to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation duringthe opening or closing● Press button 1 or 2 again.

NoteWhen the sunroof is open, the electric sunblind can only be closed to the front edgeof the sunroof.

Convenience function to open orclose the sunroof*

Fig. 91 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed withthe convenience function, just like the win-dows.

Using the door lock*● Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the unlocking or locking posi-tion to open or close the roof in the tiltedposition. Release the key to interrupt thisfunction.

Using the remote control● Keep the locking or unlocking buttonpressed to open or close the roof. If you re-lease the button is the opening or closing willstop.

Using the Keyless Access* system (onlyclosing)● Press and hold the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 91 (arrow) on the door handle toclose the sunroof. If you release the sensorsurface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof and the sunblind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind en-counter resistance or an obstacle when clos-ing, they reopen immediately.

● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do notclose.● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot beclosed due to an obstacle or some resist-ance, it stops at the corresponding positionand then opens. For automatic closing, anew closing attempt might take place.● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable toclose, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind withoutthe anti-trap function● Sunroof: within approximately 5 seconds ofhaving activated the roll-back function, press»

111

Operation

the button ››› Fig. 89 to the second levelin the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 89 D untilthe sunroof closes completely.● Sun blind: within approximately 5 secondsof having activated the anti-trap function,press button ››› Fig. 90 2 until the sun blindcloses completely.● The sunroof or sun blind close withoutthe anti-trap function intervening!● If the sunroof or sun blind will still notclose, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNINGClosing the sunroof or sun blind withoutthe anti-trap function can cause serious in-juries.● Always be careful when closing the sun-roof and sun blind.● No person should ever remain in the wayof the sunroof or sun blind, especially whenclosing without the anti-trap function.● The anti-trap function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body from be-coming trapped against the roof frame andinjuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 114 .

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn sig-nal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 118 .

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 114 .

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on ››› page 116 .

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 83.

Headlight switch

Fig. 92 Dash panel: lights control.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 92.

Sym-bol

Ignition switchedoff

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and side lightsoff.

Daylight runninglights switched on.

112

Lights

Sym-bol

Ignition switchedoff

Ignition isswitched on

The “Cominghome”, “Leavinghome” and Wel-come lights may beswitched on.

Automatic controlof dipped beamand daytime run-ning light.

Side light on. Daylight runninglights switched on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control*The automatic dipped beam control is mere-ly intended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on automatically in thefollowing situations ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.

● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights consist of individ-ual lights, integrated in the front headlights.These lights come on when the daytime run-ning lights are switched on. On vehiclesequipped with LED tail lights, the rear sidelight is switched on as well ››› .

The daytime running lights turn on everytime the ignition is switched on, if the switchis in position or , according to the levelof exterior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , alight sensor automatically switches dippedbeam on and off (including the control andinstrument lighting) or the daytime runninglights depending on the level of exteriorlighting.

Motorway light*The function is connected and disconnectedvia the corresponding Infotainment systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.

● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), thedipped beam immediately returns to its nor-mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the ignition is not connected and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 114 .● When the light switch is in position or.

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enough orat all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lights arenot bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam head lightsif it is raining or if visibility is poor. »

113

Operation

● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.● The rear fog light can dazzle drivers be-hind you. You should use the rear fog lightonly when visibility is very poor.

Fog lights

Fig. 93 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefront fog lights are on.

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pullthe light switch out to its first click position››› Fig. 93 1 , from positions , or .● Turning on the rear fog light : pull thelight switch fully out 2 from position , or .● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

NoteThe rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 94 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parkinglight (ignition switched off).Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Turning main beam headlights on: con-trol lamp lit up on the instrument pan-el.The headlight flasher comes on while wepull the lever. Control lamp lit up.

Place the lever in rest position to turn off thecorresponding function.

1

2

3

4

114

Lights

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience turn signals are activatedand deactivated in the infotainment systemby means of the function button > SET-TINGS > Light > Light assistance >Convenience turn signals ››› page 88 .

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the ig-nition off. If said light is on, an audible warn-ing will sound while the driver door is open.

● Switch the ignition off.● Move the turn signal lever up or down.

When the parking light is switched on, thefront side light and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides● Switch the ignition off.● Place the light switch in position .● Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-lights light up, and additionally the tail lightswill do so partially.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.

● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal will flashat double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.● The parking light does not activate auto-matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits ofthe system and depending on environmentaland traffic conditions. Once switched on, thesystem is activated as of a speed of about 60km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated belowabout 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .

When the system is activated and the cam-era detects other vehicles that may be daz-zled, the main beam is automatically switch-ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is auto-matically switched on. »

115

Operation

The main beam assist generally detects illu-minated areas and deactivates the mainbeam when passing through a town, for ex-ample.

Switching the main beam assist on ● Turn on the ignition and turn the lightswitch to the position .● From the base position, press the turn sig-nal and main beam headlights lever forwards››› Fig. 94 3 When the lamp is displayedon the instrument panel display, the mainbeam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off ● Turn the light switch to a position otherthan ››› page 112 .● OR: while the main beam is on, pull theturn signal light and main beam headlightslever forwards ››› Fig. 94 4 .● OR: push the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever forwards to manually turn onthe main beam. The main beam assist willthen be deactivated.

System limitationsIn the following cases, the main beam head-light must be switched off manually becausethe main beam assist will not disconnect iton time or disconnect it at all:

● On roads with insufficient lighting with veryreflective signs● If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g.pedestrians or cyclists.● On closed curves, when the traffic in theopposite direction is partially hidden, on pro-nounced slopes or inclinations.● On roads with traffic in the opposite direc-tion and with a central reservation barrierwhere the driver can see over it e.g. lorrydrivers.● In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain● In the event of dust or sand storms● If the windscreen is damaged in the cam-era's field of vision.● If the camera's field of vision is misted up,dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice.● If the camera is damaged or if the powersupply has been cut off.

WARNINGThe convenience features of the mainbeam assist should not encourage the tak-ing of risks. The system is not a replace-ment for driver concentration.● You are always in control of the mainbeam and adapting it to the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.● It is possible that the main beam head-light control does not recognise all driving

situations and is limited under certain cir-cumstances.● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation ofthe main beam control may be affected.This also applies when changes are made tothe vehicle lighting system, for example, ifadditional headlights are installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the field of vision of thecamera.

Note● The headlight flasher can be turned onand off manually at any time with the turnsignal and main beam lever ››› page 114 .● If there are objects that radiate light inthe camera's area of influence, e.g. a porta-ble navigation system, this may affect theoperation of the main beam assist system.

116

Lights

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on and itis activated when driving at speeds below ap-proximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

● If the steering wheel is turned or the turnsignal is switched on, the front fog light grad-ually turns on. After the turn, the corneringlight function is gradually switched off.● When engaging reverse gear, both frontfog lights turn on.

“Coming home” and “Leaving home”function

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it inthe dark. When switched on, the front posi-tion and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a pho-tosensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” functionFor vehicles with light and rain sensors.● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the light switch in posi-tion ››› page 112 .● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “Com-ing Home” lighting comes on. The headlightturning off time counts from when the lastdoor or rear lid are closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turningoff time has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.

● When the rotary light switch is turned toposition ››› page 112 .● With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote con-trol.● The “Leaving Home” function is only acti-vated when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”switch-on time ends (default 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the re-mote control.● When the light switch is turned to position.● With the ignition is switched on.

Welcome lightThe welcome light is a light located on theexterior mirrors, focused on the ground,which activates or deactivates if the lightswitch is in the position and the “ComingHome” or “Leaving Home” function is turnedon or off. »

117

Operation

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” function, the rotary light switchmust be in position and the light sensormust detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 95 Dash panel: hazard warning lights switch

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your ve-hicle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the electronic parking brake.

5. Move the selector lever to position P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehi-cle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several timesper second to warn the vehicles driving be-hind. If you continue braking, the hazardwarning lights will come on automaticallywhen the vehicle comes to a standstill. Theyswitch off automatically when the vehiclestarts to move again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.

● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never park inan area where the catalytic converter couldcome into contact with highly inflammablematerials, for example dry grass or spiltpetrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Dynamic headlight range control

The headlight range is automatically adjus-ted according to the vehicle load statuswhen they are switched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may mean thatthe headlights dazzle and distract otherdrivers. This could result in a serious acci-dent.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

118

Lights

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it isnormally necessary to cover part of theheadlight bulbs with stickers or to changethe adjustment of the headlights to avoiddazzling other drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution.This is known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the headlights allowsthe specific “tourist light” values to be metwithout the need for stickers or changes be-ing made to the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel, dis-plays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument cluster and controls can be ad-justed in the infotainment system, using the > SETTINGS ››› page 88 button.

In certain cases,when the engine is runningand the lights are not switched on; e.g., pass-ing through a tunnel without having activa-ted the function, a Switch on thelights warning will appear on the instru-ment panel.

Interior and reading lights1)

Glove compartment and luggage com-partment lighting*When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side andthe rear lid, the respective light will automati-cally switch on and off.

Footwell lighting*The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. This intensitycan be changed through the infotainmentsystem menu (key > SETTINGS > Light> Interior lighting ››› page 88 ).

Ambient light*The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console, the footwell area and, de-pending on the version, the front door pan-els.

The ambient lighting in the door panels maychange colour. The intensity and colour canbe adjusted through the infotainment systemmenu (key > SETTINGS > Backgroundlighting ››› page 88 ).

NoteThe reading lights go out when the vehicleis closed and locked or after a few minutesof turning the ignition off. This prevents thebattery from discharging.

1) Depending on the features fitted in the vehicle, LEDscan be used for the following interior lights: front vanitymirror light, rear vanity mirror light, footwell light, sunblind and glove compartment light.

119

Operation

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 96 Operating the windscreen wiper and rearwiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 96 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow sweep adjustable by using control››› Fig. 96 A .

3 Fast sweep adjustable by using control››› Fig. 96 A .


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by pushingthe lever towards the steering wheel,and the wipers operate simultaneously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wiperwill wipe the window approximately ev-ery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is activa-ted by pressing the lever, and the rearwiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you have warmedthe windscreen with the heating and venti-lation system. The windscreen washer fluidcould otherwise freeze on the windscreenand obscure your view of the road.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-

age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. CUPRA recommends ade-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 48 .

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The interval wipe speed varies accordingto the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicleis moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

120

Visibility

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If you stop the vehicle with the windscreenwiper in position 1 or 2, it will automaticallychange to a lower position speed. The setspeed will be resumed when the vehicle pullsaway.● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds in air recirculation modewhen the windscreen washer is activated,to prevent the smell of the windscreenwasher fluid entering the inside the vehicle.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*The heating only thaws the frozen jets, itdoes not thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient temper-ature.

Note● The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-cles that are on the windscreen. The wiperwill stop moving if the obstacle blocks itspath. Remove the obstacle and switch thewiper back on again.

● The windscreen will be wiped again ap-proximately 5 seconds after the windscreenwasher has been activated, provided thevehicle is moving (“drip” function). If youactivate the wipers less than 3 seconds af-ter the “drip” function, a new wash se-quence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

Rain sensor

Fig. 97 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 98 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency ofthe windscreen wiper intervals, dependingon the amount of rain ››› . The sensitivityof the rain sensor can be adjusted manually.Manual wipe ››› page 120 .

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 97:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor remains active andstarts operating again when the windscreenwipers are in position 1 and the vehicle istravelling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph). »

0

1

A

121

Operation

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 98 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activationtime, reduce the washing intervals or result ina fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an excessively longwipe when the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensoror make it react more slowly, later or not atall.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects thereduction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.

● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Regularly clean the sensitive surface ofthe rain sensor ››› Fig. 98 (arrow) and checkfor possible damage to the wiper blades.● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alcohol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled,the interior rear vision mirror will darken au-tomatically according to the amount of lightit receives. The anti-dazzle function is can-celled if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soon aspossible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

122

Visibility

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 99 Detail of the driver's door: control for theexterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-tion:

Turning the knob to the desired posi-tion, adjust the mirrors on the driverside (L, left) and the passenger side (R,right) to the direction desired.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.Folding in mirrors.

L/R

Synchronized regulation of the exteriormirrorsIn the infotainment system, using the func-tion button > Settings > Mirrors andwipers > Mirrors, the exterior mirrors canbe selected to adjust in a synchronised man-ner.

● Turn the knob to position L1).● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

Tilt function for front passenger exteriormirror*When parking backwards, and in order to beable to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-ror can be automatically tilted towards thepassenger to provide a better view of thekerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position assoon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-turns to its original position if the position ofthe control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings forthe tilt function● Switch the ignition on.● In the infotainment system, select >SETTINGS > Mirrors and wipers > Mir-rors > Lower in reverse gear››› page 84.● Select the R1) position on the control.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirrorso that you can see, for example, the kerbarea well.● Release the reverse gear.● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*In the infotainment system, using the func-tion button > SETTINGS > Mirrors andwipers > Mirrors, the exterior mirrors canbe selected to fold in when the vehicle isparked and locked ››› page 84 .

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retractedautomatically. When the vehicle is opened »

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-metrical.

123

Operation

with the remote control, the exterior mirrorsare deployed automatically.

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and further awaythan they really are. If you use these mirrorsto estimate the distance to vehicles behindyou when changing lane, you could mis-judge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror.● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTION● If for any reason (e.g. a bump when ma-noeuvring) one of the rear view mirrors isknocked out of position, the mirrors mustfirst be fully retracted with the electric con-trol. The rear view mirror must not beplaced by hand in the starting position, asthe folding mechanism can be damaged.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to fold

the exterior mirrors in to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in orout by hand, always use the electrical pow-er control.

Note● If the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

sun blind

Fig. 100 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 100 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, lon-gitudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, witha cover. When the cover is opened 2 a lightcomes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

NoteThe light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

124

Seats and headrests

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 101 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

1

2

3

4

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci-dents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclina-tion of the front seats only when theirmovement area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNINGIncorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-ers might cause an accidental activation ofthe electrical seat adjustment system andmake it move unexpectedly while driving.This might cause loss of control of the vehi-cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-over, the electrical components of thefront seats might be damaged.● Never attach or place seat upholstery orcovers on the electric controls.● Never use upholstery or seat covers thathave not been explicitly authorised for theseats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 102 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press thebutton according to the desired position.Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards.Seat up/down: Press the rear part of thebutton up/down. To adjust the angle ofthe seat cushion, press the front of thebutton up/down.Backrest further upright/further re-clined: press the button forwards/back-wards. »

A

B

C

125

Operation

WARNING● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, itcan cause serious injury.● The front seats can also be electricallyadjusted when the ignition is switched off.Never leave a child or any other person whomay need help in the vehicle.● In the event of an emergency, electricaladjustment can be stopped by pressing anycontrol.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the electrical compo-nents of the front seats, please refrain fromkneeling on the seat or applying sharppressure at a single point to the seat cush-ion and backrest.

Note● It may not be possible to electrically ad-just the seat if the vehicle battery is verylow.● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and dis-assembly of the headrests are described be-low. Always make sure that the seats are cor-rectly adjusted ››› page 13 .

All seats are equipped with a headrest. Thecentral rear headrest is only intended for thecentral seat of the rear bench. Therefore, donot install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrestAdjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head andunder no circumstances below eye level.Keep the back of your head always as closeto the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short peopleLower the headrest completely, even if yourhead is below its upper edge. In the lowestposition, there may be a small distance be-tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall peoplePush the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNINGIf travelling with the headrests removed orimproperly adjusted, the risk of severe orfatal injuries in the event of accidents andsudden braking or manoeuvres increases.● Always travel with the headrest correctlyinstalled and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the head-rest correctly based on your height, alwaysmaking sure that its upper edge is at thesame height as the top of the head, butnever below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the headrest aspossible and centred.● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-cle is in motion.● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the headrests are inthe non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling theheadrests, do not let them meet the toplining of the vehicle, the back rest of thefront seat or other parts of the vehicles. Ifnot, this could damage the vehicle.

126

Seats and headrests

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 103 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 104 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests● Grab the sides of the headrests with bothhands and push upwards to the desired posi-tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 103 ››› Fig. 104 but-ton on the side.

● The headrest must lock correctly in oneposition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 105 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press the side button ››› Fig. 103 1 andremove the headrest.● To refit, insert the headrest into the holesin the backrest, pushing it down until it en-gages.

Removing the rear headrestsTo remove the headrest, the correspondingbackrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 129 .

● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 105 1 , while simulta-neously pressing on the security hole 2 witha flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,and remove the headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 130.

Fitting the rear headrestsTo mount the external headrests, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 129 .● Insert the headrest bars into the guidesuntil they perceptibly engage. It should notbe possible to remove the headrest from thebackrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 130.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

127

Operation

Seat functions

Memory function*

Fig. 106 On the outer side of the driver's seat:memory buttons.

Memory buttonsThe memory buttons can be used to saveand turn on settings for the driver seat andthe exterior mirrors.

Save the settings of the driver seat and theexterior mirrors while driving forward● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Move the gearshift to the neutral position.● Switch the ignition on.● Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mir-rors.● Press for longer than 1 second››› Fig. 106.● Press the memory button in which to storethe settings within approx. 10 seconds. A

warning sound will confirm they have beenstored.

Storing the passenger rear view mirror set-tings while driving in reverse● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Move the gearshift to the neutral position.● Switch the ignition on.● Press the required memory button.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirrorso that you can see, for example, the kerbarea well.● The new position of the mirror will be stor-ed automatically and allocated to the vehiclekey that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating settings● With the vehicle stopped and the ignitionswitched on, press and hold the correspond-ing memory button until the saved position isreached.● OR: With the ignition switched off and thedriver's door open, briefly press the corre-sponding button.● The front passenger side exterior mirrorautomatically changes from the positionstored for reversing as soon as the vehiclemoves forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h(10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is

changed to a position other than R››› page 122.

To activate the memory function of thevehicle keyCondition: a position must be memorised inthe memory.

● Open the driver-side door.● Press and hold any memory button.● Within three seconds of the move beingcompleted, push the open button on thevehicle key. An audible warning confirms thesettings have been activated.

Adjusting the wing mirrors for driving andassigning driver seat settings to a vehiclekey● Activate the memory function of the vehi-cle key● With the ignition switched on, adjust theexterior mirrors and the seat.● An audible warning confirms the saved po-sition, both when turning off the ignition andlocking the vehicle. The settings are as-signed to the vehicle key.

To deactivate the memory function of thevehicle keyCondition: a position must be memorised inthe memory.

128

Seats and headrests

● Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 106 .● Within the following 10 seconds, push theopen button on the vehicle key. An audi-ble warning confirms the settings have beendeactivated.

Initialising the seat position memoryThe position memory system must be restar-ted if, for example, the driver seat has beenchanged.

Restarting deletes all memories and assign-ments for the seat with position memory.The memory buttons can then be reprog-rammed and the vehicle keys re-assigned.

● Open the driver door and do not get intothe vehicle.● Operating the seat settings from outsidethe vehicle.● Move the angle of the seat backrest com-pletely forwards.● Release the control to set the angle andthen press again until an audible warning isheard.

WARNINGAdjust the memory function only when thevehicle is stationary.

NoteIf the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi-nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or lat-er, the driver seat and the exterior mirrorsdo not move automatically.

Folding down and raising the rear seatbackrest

Fig. 107 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

Fig. 108 In the luggage compartment: levers forremote release* of the left part 1 and right part

2 of the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partcan be lowered forward separately to extendthe luggage compartment.

Lowering the rear seat backrest with theunlock button● Push the headrest down as far as it will go››› page 126.● Pull the unlock button ››› Fig. 107 1 for-ward and lift the backrest at the same time.The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Folding down the backrest from the bootwith the unlocking levers*● Push the headrest down as far as it will go››› page 126.● Open the rear lid ››› page 103 . »

129

Operation

● Pull the unlocking lever ››› Fig. 108 of thepart of the backrest to fold down.● The corresponding part of the backrest willbe unlocked or will be folded forward.● If necessary, close the rear lid ››› page 103 .

Folding up the rear seat backrest● Lift the backrest and press it firmly into thelock until it engages ››› .● It should not be possible to see the redmark of the unlock button 2 .● Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped.● The backrest must be properly engaged.● If necessary, adjust the headrest.

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● When folding down the rear seat, alwaysmake sure there are no people or animals inthe backrest area.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feet andother body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rear

backrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in aseat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will be thrown forwards, along withthe backrest, during an accident or a sud-den driving or braking manoeuvre.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child).

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before folding the rear seat backrest for-ward, always adjust the front seats so thatneither the headrests nor the cushions ofthe rear backrest can hit them.● Before folding the rear seat backrest, al-ways make sure there are no objects in themovement area of the backrest.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 109 Front centre armrest

To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 109 , set-ting by setting.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highestposition. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move itforward ››› Fig. 109 or backward as much aspossible in the direction of the correspond-ing arrow.

WARNINGThe front centre armrest may obstruct thedriver's arm movements, which could causean accident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

130

Transport and practical equipment

● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-rest while the vehicle is in motion, not evena child. This position is incorrect and maycause severe injuries.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage inthe vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 273 and onthe roof ››› page 138 . When doing so, pleaseconsider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy objectsin the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum author-ised weight per axle, as well as the maximumauthorised weight of the vehicle››› page 327.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 135.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure adhesive of the tyres››› page 304.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre pressurecontrol system, adjust to the new load statusif necessary ››› page 308 .

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safely.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the dashboard.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely. »

131

Operation

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of controlof the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartment thatare unsecured could move suddenly andmodify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasteningrings are commercially available from ac-cessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 110 In the luggage compartment: removingand fitting the shelf.

Fig. 111 In the luggage compartment: removingand fitting the shelf.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 110 B fromtheir hooks A .

132


● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 111 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 133.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the“recess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 111 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 110 B to the rearlid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsor in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.

● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

Store the rear shelf

Fig. 112 In the luggage compartment: covers forstoring the rear shelf.

Fig. 113 In the luggage compartment: fitting therear shelf.

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot floor.

● Remove the left and right covers››› Fig. 112.● Place the rear shelf in the correspondinghousing ››› Fig. 113 .● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

133

Operation

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 114 Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 115 Variable luggage compartment floor: in-clined position.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 114 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports››› Fig. 114 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supportsas far as the rear seat backrest and then low-er the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 114 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports››› Fig. 114 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kitarea.

● Lift the variable floor in the high positionusing handle ››› Fig. 114 1 , pull it up andpush it towards the backrest of the rear seatsuntil it folds along the hinge line and themovable part of the floor is resting on itself.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 115(arrows).

Variable floor with folded seats● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 114 1 and pull it back a little.● Push the variable floor towards the foldedrear seats with the handle 1 using somedownward pressure so that the moving partof the floor is flush with the backs of the rearseats.

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.

134


● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the top position is 100 kg.● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefullyguide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 116 In the luggage compartment: fasteningrings.

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 116 on thefront and rear of the boot to secure loose

objects and luggage with fastening belts andcords.

In order to use the fastening rings, they mustbe lifted beforehand.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fatalinjuries.● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.● Tighten the belts and straps in a cross lay-out over the load placed on the boot floorand secure them to the fastening ringssafely.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained from spe-cialised dealerships. To do so, CUPRA rec-ommends going to a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.● The fastening rings are rendered unusa-ble for versions with a spare wheel.

135

Operation

Net bag*

Fig. 117 In the luggage compartment: net baghooked up at floor level.

Fig. 118 In the luggage compartment: rings 1and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

The luggage compartment prevents lightluggage from moving. The net bag has a zipand can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggagecompartment floorIf necessary, the front eyes must be unfoldedfirst ››› page 135 .

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 and 2 ››› Fig. 117 ››› . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-old● Secure the short net hooks to the fasten-ing rings ››› Fig. 118 1 ››› . The bag zipshould be facing upwards.● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bagThe hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fasteningrings.● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-ing rings of the boot it must be stretchedout. Once hooked up it is taut. If the netbag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectlythe hooks could cause injuries.● Always secure the bag hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from the

fastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks are re-leased suddenly.● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unfastenedsuddenly, this may cause injuries.

Bag hooks

Fig. 119 In the luggage compartment: bag hooks.

There may be hooks for hanging bags onboth sides of the luggage compart-ment››› Fig. 119 .

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

136


WARNINGNever use the hooks to hang luggage orother objects. In case of sudden braking oran accident, the hooks could break.

CAUTIONEach hook is designed for a maximum loadof 2.5 kg.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-jects*

Fig. 120 In the rear seat backrest: opening thetrapdoor.

Fig. 121 In the luggage compartment: openingthe trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting longitems in the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard● Lower the centre armrest.● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 120 1 down and forwards.● Open the rear lid.● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.● Secure the objects with the seat belt.

● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.● Close the rear lid.● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

NoteThe tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press therelease lever down, in the direction of thearrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 121 .

Net partition*

Fig. 122 Net partition fitted. »

137

Operation

The purpose of the net partition is to preventthe items in the boot from moving into thecabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.

Fitting the net partitionThe partition net can be fitted behind therear seat or, depending on the features, be-hind the front seats with the second row ofseats lowered.

● If required, remove the rear shelf››› page 132.● Secure the net partition in the left housingof the roof ››› Fig. 122 A . Make sure to movethe cross rod down beyond the upper posi-tion.● Hook in the net partition on the rear right-hand side roof housing by pressing on therod ››› Fig. 122 A .● Secure two hooks of the partition net tothe fastening rings of the boot ››› Fig. 122 Band tighten the straps firmly.

To remove it proceed in reverse order.

WARNINGDuring a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-jects could be flung though the interior andcause serious or fatal injuries.● Check whether the cross rods are cor-rectly engaged.

● Always secure objects, even when the netpartition is properly assembled.● There should be nobody behind the netpartition when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTIONIf the net partition is secured incorrectly orto incorrect points, this may damage thevehicle.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only CUPRA-approved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof car-rier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the max-imum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Cross bars, the roof carrier system andthe load secured on them should not inter-fere with the roof aerial or hamper the pathof the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

138


For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roofcarrier system

Fig. 123 Attachment points for the roof railings forthe roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boardsor boats on the roof. The appropriate acces-sories can be purchased at specialised CU-PRA dealers or any SEAT dealership.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-

sembly instructions that come with thecrossbars and the roof carrier system inquestion into account.

The crossbars are assembled on the roofrailings. The distance between crossbars››› Fig. 123 A should be between 70 and 90cm and the distance between the crossbarsand the brackets of the roof railings B mustbe 15 cm.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg.This figure comes from the combined weightof the roof carrier, the cross bars and theload itself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› . »

139

Operation

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certainfrequency.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system, evenif the maximum authorised roof load hasnot been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward as pos-sible and distribute the vehicle load uni-formly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. Thiscould lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.

● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particularlyduring the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materialsleft inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suctionpads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

140


Glove compartment

Fig. 124 On the front passenger side: glove com-partment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theCD player and SD card reader are located inthe glove compartment.

Opening and closing the glove compart-mentOpening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 124 andopen the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the eventof an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.

● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Storage compartment under frontseats*

Fig. 125 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handleand take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat untilit engages.

WARNINGIf the drawer is left open, it could preventuse of the pedals. This may cause seriousaccidents and injuries.● Always keep the drawer closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer

and any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTIONThe drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Drink holder

Fig. 126 Centre console: front drinks holders.

The storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder.

Front drink holdersThere are two cup holders in the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 126 .

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries. »

141

Operation

● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the vehi-cle due to cold or heat.● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high orvery low.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it maydamage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the ve-hicle:

● In the centre console.● In the top of the glove compartment in ve-hicles that do not have a CD reader. The loadof the compartment should not exceed1.2 kg.● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doorsand the rear.

WARNINGHanging clothes may decrease the driver'svisibility, which may cause serious acci-dents and injuries.● Always hang clothes from hangers in sucha way that the driver's visibility is not affec-ted.● Only hang light pieces of clothing fromthe hangers of the vehicle. Never leaveheavy, hard or sharp objects in the pocketsof these pieces of clothing.● Do not use clothes hangers to hang upthe clothing, as this could interfere with thefunction of the head-protection airbags.

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 127 Vehicle 12 volt socket.

Fig. 128 On the left side of the luggage compart-ment: 230 volt power socket.

12 volt power socket ››› Fig. 127 :In the centre consoleOn the left side of the luggage compart-ment

1

2

142


In the rear part of the centre console:(USB socket).

In the centre console● Remove the cover from the socket, locatedon the centre console ››› Fig. 127 1 .● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

In the luggage compartment*● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 127 2 .● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

USB power socketsDepending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats 3 .These connectors can work at a maximumpower of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

3 Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con-sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

230 Volts 150 watts (300 watt peaks)

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket.

Make sure that the maximum power con-sumption displayed on each outlet is not ex-ceeded. The power consumption of devicesis shown on the model plate.

When connecting two or more electrical de-vices at the same time, make sure that theirtotal consumption never exceeds 190 watts››› .

230 volt power socket*With the engine running, the power socket››› Fig. 128 activates automatically as soon asa connector is plugged in. If there is enoughpower available, the socket can still be usedwhile the engine is off ››› Connect an electrical device: Open the cov-er and insert the plug into the power socketas far as possible to unlock the built-in childlock. The socket only supplies power oncethe child lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket

Steady greenlight:

The childproof lock is unlocked.The socket is ready to operate.

Flashing greenlight:

The ignition is switched off, butthere is enough power availableto continue supplying the socketwith current for a maximum of 10minutes. If the connector is un-plugged before this time elapses,the socket is disconnected andcannot be used again until the ig-nition is switched on again.

Flashing red light:There is an anomaly, e.g. discon-nection due to a current surge oroverheating.

Disconnection due to overheatingWhen the temperature exceeds a certainvalue, the 230 volt socket inverter is auto-matically disconnected. The disconnectionprevents overheating when the power con-sumption of the connected devices is exces-sive or the ambient temperature is very high.The 230-volt power supply can be used onceagain after a cooling time. First unplug theconnector of the connected device andthen plug it back in again. This prevents theelectrical device from being switched onagain if this is not wanted.

WARNINGThe electrical system is under high voltage! »

143

Operation

● Do not spill liquids onto the socket.● Do not plug adapters or extension cordsinto the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise,the integrated child lock will be unlockedand the power socket will operate.● Do not insert conductive objects (a knit-ting needle, for example) into the 230 voltpower socket.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the ig-nition is on. Improper use may cause seri-ous injury or even fire. Children shouldtherefore not be left in the vehicle unatten-ded if the button is also left behind. Other-wise there is a possibility that they may beinjured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

CAUTION● 230 volt power socket:– Do not leave devices or connectors that

are too heavy (e.g. a transformer)hanging directly from the power sock-et.

– Do not connect neon lamps.– Only connect devices to the socket if

the device and socket voltage match.

– The built-in overload disconnect func-tion prevents any electrical devicesthat require a high start-up currentfrom turning on. In this case, unplugthe electrical device's power supply andre-try the connection after about 10seconds.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a battery dis-charge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off,unplug the appliances from the USB portsto protect them from any damage causedby fluctuations in voltage.● Some appliances may not work properlywhen connected to the 230 volt socketsdue to a lack of power (watts).

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation and cool-ing

Introduction

The Climatronic is an automatic air condi-tioner that heats, cools and dehumidifies theair.

With the Climatronic’s automatic mode it ispossible to automatically regulate the airtemperature, distribution and flow.

The air conditioning system is more effectiveif the vehicle's interior is kept closed. When alot of heat builds up inside the vehicle, venti-lation can speed up the cooling process.

To switch a specific function on, press theappropriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The illuminated LEDs next to the buttons in-dicate that the function is switched on.

In the air conditioning settings in the info-tainment system, the yellow function buttonsindicate that the function is switched on››› page 147.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against

144

Air conditioning

impurities in the air taken into the vehicle in-terior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely dueto use in areas with very high levels of air pol-lution, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on,the compressor consumes engine powerand has influence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled morequickly by opening the windows and thepanoramic sliding sunroof briefly.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are free ofice and snow, and that they are not fogged,so as to maintain good visibility of every-thing outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.

● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioning, heater or rear window heating tomaintain good visibility to the outside.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the climate control or air condi-tioner off if you think it may be broken. Thiswill avoid additional damage. Have the cli-mate control or air conditioning checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the climate control or air con-ditioning require specialist knowledge andspecial tools. CUPRA recommends going toa specialised CUPRA Service or SEAT Offi-cial Service.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, CUPRArecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, press

the button. The button lamp shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required todefrost windows as quickly as possible isonly available when the engine has reachedits normal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots inthe luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● It is advisable to turn on the air condi-tioning at least once a month, to lubricatethe system gaskets and prevent leaks. If adecrease in the cooling capacity is detec-ted, a Technical Service should be consul-ted to check the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

145

Operation

Climatronic* controls and functions

Fig. 129 In the centre console: Climatronic controls.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sidescan be adjusted separately using the adjust-ers. The selected temperature is shown onthe display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so thatsettings on the driver's side apply to the pas-senger side. Use the temperature regulatorfor the passenger side to set a different tem-perature.

The set air temperature is kept constant.Temperature and the amount and distribu-tion of air are controlled automatically. Auto-matic mode is switched off when the fanpower is changed manually.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool-ing system.

The cooling mode cools and dehumidifiesthe air.

Blower Adjust the fan power.

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for com-fort. It can also be manually distributed tothe desired zone by pressing the corre-sponding button:

The airflow is directed towards the chestThe airflow is directed towards the foot-well.

The airflow is directed at the wind-screen.

Maximum cooling power The recirculation of air and the cooling sys-tem turn on automatically and air distribu-tion adjusts automatically to the position .

Defrost/demist function The Climatronic’s defrost function removesice and fog from the windscreen. The air isdehumidified and the fan is set high.

Infotainment System Open the air conditioning settings in the in-fotainment system ››› page 147 .

The climate control operation and settingsmenu will be displayed in the infotainmentsystem screen.

146

Air conditioning

Heated rear window Switches the heated rear window on and off.

This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. By saving electrical power youcan also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-estab-lished.

Air recirculation Switches the air recirculation mode on andoff ››› page 148

Seat heating Switches seat heating on and off››› page 149

Switching off Switch off the air conditioning system. If thefan is manually set to , it also switches off.

The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter canreduce the amount of harmful substancesthat get inside, including allergens››› page 148.

Windscreen heating Switches the heated windscreen on and offwith the engine running ››› page 150 .

Steering wheel heating Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating››› page 150.

Setting the temperature on the info-tainment system

The air conditioning settings in the infotain-ment system are available in the Climatronic.Depending on the vehicle equipment.

Open the air conditioner menu● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrol panel.

The current air conditioning settings are dis-played at the top of the screen. The currentair conditioning settings are displayed at thetop of the screen.

Air conditioning operating modesThe air conditioning operating modes arecolour coded:

● Blue: Cooling.● Red: Heating.

General settings submenuSets the following functions:

● Automatic air recirculation mode››› page 148.● Automatic heated windscreen››› page 150.

Presets submenuSets the automatic or manual mode of thecooling system or switches the air condition-ing off.

Air conditioning profileAdjust the power of the fan in AUTO mode.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air ventsmust remain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in therequired direction to open and close the airvents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustableair vents in the dash panel, in the footwells »

147

Operation

and in the rear area of the passenger com-partment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

For safety reasons, air recirculation is switch-ed off in the following situations:

● When the button is pressed or theair distributor is turned to .● When a sensor detects that the vehicle'swindows could mist up.

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation.

Climatronic automatic air recirculationmodeWith the automatic air recirculation modeactivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabininterior is enabled. If the system detects a

high concentration of hazardous substancesin the ambient air, air recirculation mode isswitched on automatically. When the level ofimpurities drops to within a normal range, re-circulation mode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-matically in versions without humidity sensorand in the following external conditions:

● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+38°F).● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).● The cooling system is switched off, theoutside temperature is below +15°C (+59°F)and the windscreen wipers are switched on.

Air Care Climatronic with allergen filterThe Air Care Climatronic allergen filter canreduce the amount of harmful substances,including allergens, that get inside.

If the Air Care option is switched on, the airconditioning’s air recirculation mode ismaximised until there is a risk of the windowsmisting up due to humidity inside the vehicleand the outside temperature. The air recir-culation mode is automatically regulated andincorporates an automatic setting to preventthe vehicle occupants suffering from fatigue.

● Open the air conditioning settings in theinfotainment system ››› page 147 .● Switch the Air Care function on or off usingactive Air Care.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.● If the cooling system is switched off andair recirculation mode switched on, thewindows can mist over very quickly, consid-erably limiting visibility.

CAUTIONDo not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condi-tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on thecooling system vaporiser and on the activa-ted charcoal cartridge of the dust and pol-len filter, leading to a permanently un-pleasant smell.

148

Air conditioning

Note● Climatronic: air recirculation mode is ac-tivated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleas-ant odours from entering the vehicle interi-or when it is in reverse and while theautomatic windscreen wiper is working.● When the outside temperature is veryhigh, selecting manual air recirculationmode for a short period refreshes the vehi-cle interior more quickly.

Seat heating*

With the engine running, the front seats andside rear seats can be electrically heated tothree power levels.

Seat heating power levelsSeat heating operating modes are colour co-ded. At the highest heating level, all threeLEDs light up.

Control seat heating● Press buttons or on the control panelto turn on the seat heating as high as possi-ble.● Press buttons o repeatedly to adjust itto the required level.● To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

When the engine is started again within ap-proximately 10 minutes, the most recentlyset heating level for the driver's seat isswitched on automatically.

Cases in which the heat seating should notbe switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any ofthe following conditions are met:

● If the seat is occupied by a person withlimited pain or temperature perceptions››› .● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The outdoor or indoor temperature isgreater than +25°C (77°F).

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have alimited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's tempera-ture control is detected, have it checked bya specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● If the seat heating generates any kind ofodour, it must be switched off immediatelyand it should be checked by a specialistservice centre.● If you have replaced the original uphols-tery with another material, the seat heatingmay overheat or its operation may be limi-ted. »

149

Operation

For the sake of the environmentTo save fuel, turn off the seat heating assoon as possible.

Steering wheel heating*

Steering wheel heating works only with theengine running.

Steering wheel heating levelsThe selected flywheel heating level will bedisplayed on the instrument panel display.

Level control is carried out using the but-ton on the multifunction steering wheel:

● Brief press (less than 1 second): the heat-ing is switched on at maximum level. Pressthe steering wheel button repeatedly untilthe desired level is adjusted. To switch offsteering wheel heating, press the steeringwheel button repeatedly until the heatedsteering wheel OFF icon is displayed on theinstrument cluster.● Long press (more than 1 second): the heat-ing is switched off directly from the level thatis currently operating. If the steering wheelbutton is pressed again for a long period, theheating is switched on directly at the last lev-el saved before switching off.

Automatic offThe steering wheel heating will be switchedoff automatically when any of the followingconditions are met:

● Power consumption is too high.● The steering wheel heating system is faulty.● If the ignition is switched off.

Windscreen heating*

Fig. 130 Windscreen humidity and temperaturesensor.

The brake servo works only when the engineis running.

The heated windscreen is comprised of a setof heated wires placed between the layers ofthe windscreen which, when electric currentis supplied to them, heat up and cause thetemperature of the glass to rise.

Its function is to assist the air-conditioningsystem to prevent the windscreen from mist-ing up or to demist it faster if it does mist up.

The system can be switched on manually orautomatically.

Manual activation● Press the button in the air conditioningsettings in the infotainment system.

The heated windscreen is switched off basedon the outside temperature and, in any case,after approximately 8 minutes.

Automatic activationThe heated windscreen switches on auto-matically when a window is at risk of mistingup.

● Open the air conditioning settings in theinfotainment system ››› page 147 .● Switch the automatic heated windscreenon or off.

The automatic heated windscreen is switch-ed on, even when the air conditioning isswitched off.

Thermal windscreen using the defrostfunctionIf the defrost function is switched on and asensor detects that the windscreen couldmist up, the heated windscreen switches on.

150

Air conditioning

When does the heated windscreen switchoff?The heated windscreen switches off whenone of the following conditions is met:

● Power consumption is too high.● The air conditioner fuse is faulty.● If the preset time has elapsed.

Troubleshooting

Cooling mode cannot be switched on oroperates in a limited wayThe cooling mode works only with the en-gine running and if the ambient temperatureis above +3 °C (+38 °F). When the engine isvery hot, the cooling mode is deactivated.

● Switch on the fan.● Check the air conditioning fuse››› page 56.● Dust and pollen filter● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

The heating and fresh air system cannotbe switched on or operates in a limited way● The heating and fresh air system and thedefrost function operate best when the en-gine is hot.

● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

The windows are misted upWindows mist up when they are cooler thanthe ambient temperature and the air is verydamp. Cold air can absorb less moisture thanhot air, so the windows mist up more often incold weather.

● The air vent in front of the windscreenkeeps it free of ice, snow and leaves, whichimproves the performance of the heatingand cooling systems.● The air grooves located at the rear of theluggage compartment must be kept clear toallow the air to circulate through the vehiclefrom front to back.● Switch on the demist function››› page 146.

The temperature unit is not correctUse the infotainment system to change theunits for all of the vehicle's temperature dis-plays.

Water or water vapour under the vehicleWhen the outside air is very humid and theambient temperature is high, condensationmay drip from the evaporator of the coolingsystem, which can form a puddle under the

vehicle. This is completely normal and is noindication of a leak.

If the outside air is very humid and the ambi-ent temperature is low, the auxiliary heatingcan evaporate the condensation. In thiscase, steam may come out from under thevehicle. This does not mean that the vehiclehas broken down.

151

Infotainment system

Infotainment system

Introduction

First steps

Introduction

Infotainment functions and settings dependon the country and equipment

Before first useBefore the first use, bear in mind the follow-ing points, to take full advantage of the func-tions and settings offered:

● Observe the basic safety warnings››› page 152.● Reset the Infotainment factory settings.● Search and store favourite radio stations onthe preset buttons so you can tune themquickly.● Use only suitable audio sources and datamedia.● Pair a mobile phone to use phone man-agement through the Infotainment system.● Use current maps for navigation.● Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the cor-responding services.

Current documentation attachedFor using infotainment and its components,take into account, together with this instruc-tion manual, the following documentation:

● Supplements to your vehicle’s on-boarddocumentation.● Instruction Manual of the mobile phonedevice or audio sources.● Operating instructions for data media andexternal players.● Manuals for the Infotainment accessoriessubsequently installed or used additionally.● Description of services when running SEATCONNECT services.

Safety instructions

Some function areas may include links tothird-party websites. CUPRA is not the ownerof the third-party websites accessiblethrough the links, and assumes no liability fortheir content.

Some function areas may include outside in-formation from third-party providers. CUPRAis not responsible for such information beingcorrect, up-to-date or complete, or for en-suring it does not infringe the rights of thirdparties.

Radio stations and owners of data media andaudio sources are responsible for the infor-mation they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tallbuildings, mountains or due to the operationof other electrical devices, such as chargers,can also interfere with the reception of theradio signal.

Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on theantenna and on the window panes can inter-fere with radio reception.

WARNINGThe infotainment central computer is in-terconnected with the control units moun-ted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a se-rious danger of accident and injury if thecentral computer is repaired or disassem-bled and reassembled incorrectly.● Never replace the central computer withanother used, recycled or from another ve-hicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassemblyof the central computer should only be car-ried out at specialised workshops. To do so,CUPRA recommends going to a specialisedCUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealership.

WARNINGThe factory assembled radio with integra-ted software is interconnected with thecontrol units mounted on the vehicle.

152

Introduction

Therefore, there is a serious danger of acci-dent and injury if the radio is repaired ordisassembled and reassembled incorrectly.● Never replace the radio with another ra-dio that is used, recycled or from anothervehicle at the end of its useful life.● The repair or disassembly and reassemblyof the radio should only be carried out atspecialised workshops. To do so, CUPRArecommends going to a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

WARNINGAny distraction affecting the driver in anyway can lead to an accident and cause inju-ries. Reading the information on the screenand managing the infotainment system candistract your attention from traffic andcause an accident.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing an audiosource or data media while driving can dis-tract your attention from the traffic andcause an accident.

WARNINGSelect volume settings that allow you toeasily hear signals from outside the vehicle

at all times (e.g. emergency services si-rens).● Hearing may be impaired if using too higha volume setting, even if only for short peri-ods of time.

WARNINGThe following circumstances may result inan emergency call, phone call or datatransmission not being made or being in-terrupted:● When in areas with zero or insufficientmobile telephony or GPS signal. Also intunnels, confined areas between very tallbuildings, garages, underpasses, mountainsand valleys.● When in areas with sufficient mobilephone or GPS signal, the telephony net-work of the telecommunications providerhas interference or is not available.● When the vehicle components necessaryto make emergency calls, phone calls andto transmit data are damaged, do not workor do not have sufficient electrical power.● When the battery of the mobile phonedevice is discharged or its charge level is in-sufficient.

WARNINGIn some countries and some telephonenetworks it is only possible to make anemergency call, if a mobile telephone de-

vice is connected to the telephone inter-face of the vehicle, inside it there is an “un-locked” SIM card with sufficient balance tomake calls and with sufficient network sig-nal coverage.

WARNINGRead and observe the operating instruc-tions provided by the manufacturer inquestion when using mobile phone devices,data media, external devices, external au-dio and multimedia sources.

WARNINGPosition the connection cables of the audiosources and external devices so that theydo not interfere with the driver.

WARNINGWhen changing or connecting an audio ormultimedia source may cause suddenchanges in the volume.● Lower the volume before connecting orswitching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNINGIf mobile phone and radiocommunicationdevices are used without connection to anexternal antenna, the maximum electro-magnetic radiation levels inside the vehiclemight be surpassed, thus posing a risk tothe health of the driver and passengers. »

153

Infotainment system

This is also the case if the external antennahas not been correctly installed.● Keep a distance of at least 20 centime-tres between the antennas of the mobilephone device and an active medical device,such as a pacemaker, as mobile phonesmight alter the functioning of these devi-ces.● Do not carry a mobile phone switched onvery close or directly on top of an activemedical device, for instance in a chestpocket.● Immediately turn off the mobile phone ifyou suspect it is causing interferences in anactive medical device or any other medicaldevice.

WARNINGMobile phones, external devices and acces-sories that are loose or not properly se-cured could move around the passengercompartment during a sudden driving orbraking manoeuvre or an accident andcause damage or injury.● Set mobile phone devices, external devi-ces and their accessories outside the air-bag deployment areas or store them se-curely.

WARNINGThe centre armrest may obstruct the driv-er's arm movements, which could cause anaccident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

WARNINGIf the light conditions are not good and thescreen is damaged or dirty, the indicationsand information displayed on the screenmay not be read or be read incorrectly.● The indications and information dis-played on the screen should never induceto take any risk that compromises safety.The screen is not a replacement for driverawareness.

WARNINGRadio stations can transmit disaster or haz-ard announcements. The following condi-tions prevent such notices from being re-ceived or issued:● When in areas with zero or insufficient ra-dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areasbetween very tall buildings, garages, under-passes, mountains and valleys.● When the frequency bands of the radiostation have interference or are not availa-ble in areas with sufficient radio signal re-ception.

● When the speakers and the vehicle com-ponents necessary for radio reception aredamaged, do not work or do not have suffi-cient electrical power.● When the infotainment is switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off mobile phone devices in areaswith a risk of explosion!

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situa-tion.● Traffic signs, signalling systems, trafficregulations and local circumstances prevailover driving recommendations and naviga-tion system indications.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Certain circumstances can significantlyinitially planned lengthen both the dura-tion of the trip and the route to the desti-nation, or even temporarily prevent naviga-tion to it, for example, if a road is closed totraffic.

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, the

154

Introduction

mobile device in question must be switchedoff at all times. The radiation produced by amobile phone device when switched onmay interfere with sensitive technical andmedical equipment, possibly resulting inmalfunction or damage to the equipment.

NoteIf the playback volume is excessive or dis-torted, the speakers may be damaged.

155

Infotainment system

Overview and controls

Connect System

Fig. 131 Overview: control unit and indication in the10-inch version

Touch screen. The infotainment func-tions can be used through the screen.Navigation MenuFull Link menuTurn volume upTurn volume downTurn the infotainment on/off

1

2

3

4

5

6

HOME button.: main menu with widget views.: main menu in mosaic mode.

7

156

Introduction

General instructions for use

Operating indications

● The infotainment needs a few seconds forthe complete start-up of the system andduring that time it does not react to inputs.Only the image of the rear view camera* sys-tem can be displayed during system start-up.● The display of all indications and the exe-cution of functions only takes place once theinfotainment system has finished booting.The duration of the system booting dependson the number of infotainment functionsand may take longer than normal in theevent of very high or very low temperatures.● When using the infotainment system andcorresponding accessories, e.g., head-phones, bear in mind country-specific regu-lations and legal provisions.● Some functions of the infotainment systemrequire an active SEAT CONNECT user ac-count and an Internet connection for the ve-hicle. The data transmission must not belimited to perform the functions.● To use the infotainment system, simplylightly press a button or touch the screen.● For the correct operation of the infotain-ment system it is important that it is switchedon and that, if necessary, the time and dateof the vehicle are set correctly.

● If a function button is missing on thescreen, it is not a device defect, but corre-sponds to the specific equipment of thecountry or version.● Some infotainment functions can only beselected when the vehicle is at a standstill. Insome countries, the selector lever must alsobe in the parking position P or in neutral po-sition N. It is not a malfunction, but is due tocompliance with legal provisions.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you disconnect the 12-volt battery, turnon the ignition before restarting the infotain-ment system.● If the setup is changed, this may changethe display on the screen and in some cases,the infotainment system may behave in amanner different to that described in this in-struction manual.● Ensure that any repairs or modificationsthat need to be carried out on the infotain-ment system are carried out by a specialisedworkshop. To do so, CUPRA recommendsgoing to a specialised CUPRA dealer or anySEAT dealership.● Using a mobile phone device inside the ve-hicle may cause noise in the speakers.● In some countries, the infotainment sys-tem automatically shuts off when the engine

is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt bat-tery charge level is low.● On vehicles with park assist, the audiosource volume is automatically loweredwhen reverse gear is selected. The volumereduction can be adjusted.● Information about the included softwareand the license conditions can be found inSettings > Copyright.● When selling or lending the vehicle, makesure that all saved data, files and settingshave been deleted and, if necessary, exter-nal audio sources and data media have beenremoved.

NoteYou will find more information and tips forusing the infotainment system in the Helpmenu.

HOME screen

In the control and display unit you can set upthe views and representation on the homescreen or use the factory setting templates.

If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not adevice defect, but corresponds to the spe-cific equipment of the country or version.

The following menus can be included as anicon on the home screen: »

157

Infotainment system

Main menus on the home screen

Navigation ››› page 183

Radio/Multimedia ››› page 176

Telephone ››› page 190

Full Link ››› page 167

Setup ››› page 159

Vehicle ››› page 88

Data ››› page 87

Air conditioning ››› page 144

Sound

Users

a) Privacy mode ››› page 167

Store

Legal

Help

a) Depends on the selected privacy mode.

Managing the infotainment system

Execute the functions and settings with theinfotainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotain-ment system has different controls:● Touch screen.● Touch zones outside the screen, for exam-ple, Volume (+ -).

Opening the Quick GuideYou will find more information and tips forhandling in the Quick Guide of the infotain-ment system.

● Press HOME > .

Connecting and disconnecting the info-tainment systemThe infotainment system turns on when theignition is switched on, unless it has beenmanually turned off beforehand.

The infotainment system starts-up with thelast set volume, provided that this does notexceed the preset maximum start-up vol-ume.

The infotainment system automatically turnsoff when the driver's door is opened, provi-ded the ignition has been switched off be-forehand.

Moving objects and adjusting volumeMove objects on the screen to adapt set-tings, for example, with scrollable buttons orto move the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, customisemenus and views.

Increasing and reducing images or mapsizesTip: use your thumb and index finger.● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and leave them on the screen.● To enlarge views, slowly separate one fin-ger from the other. To reduce views, slowlybring one finger towards the other.

NoteIf you turn on the infotainment systemmanually with the ignition off, it will auto-matically turn off after about 30 minutes.

Customising the infotainment system

Customise the menus and infotainmentviews to quickly access your favourite ormost frequently used functions.

The main menu contains function buttonsfor accessing all of the Infotainment apps.

Customise shortcutsAt the bottom of the screen you will findshortcuts to customisable system functions.Use the settings to delete or replace them,or change their order.

158

Introduction

● Press and hold one of the icons (or press +of an empty position) to display an additionalwindow.● Select one of the icons from the apps bar.● Press to delete an icon.● Click on an icon in the additional windowto replace the value.● Hold your finger on one of the icons anddrag it to the desired position.● To close the edit mode, press in the ad-ditional window, or press .

NoteThe shortcut bar cannot be edited whenthe vehicle is moving.

Settings (system and sound)

The selection of possible settings varies de-pending on the country, the equipment inquestion and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settingsThe meaning of the following symbols arevalid for all system and sound settings.

All changes are automatically applied whenthe menus are closed.

Symbol and its meaning

The setting is selected and activated orconnected.

The setting is not selected, disabled ordisconnected.

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To increase a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with the scrol-lable button without adjusting.

Sound settingsAccess the sound settings: HOME >

In the sound settings there may be the fol-lowing functions, information and settingoptions:

● Equaliser● Position.● Settings.

System settingsAccess the system settings: HOME > .

In the system settings there may be the fol-lowing functions, information and settingoptions:

● Screen.● Time and date.● Language.● Additional keypad languages.● Units.● Voice control.● Wi-Fi.● Applications and services● Manage mobile devices.● Reset factory settings.● System information.● Copyright.● Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sour-cesIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thevolume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audiosource is very low, increase the output vol-ume on the external audio source. If this isnot enough, change the input volume tomedium or high. »

159

Infotainment system

If the sound from the connected externalaudio source is too loud or distorted, lowerthe output volume on the external audiosource. If this is not enough, change the in-put volume to medium or low.

Clean the screen

Remove persistent dirt carefully and withoutusing aggressive cleaning products. To cleanthe screen we recommend that:

● The infotainment system is switched off.● Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with wa-ter ››› page 315 .● In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt bymoistening with a little water. Then carefullyremove with a clean, soft cloth.

CAUTIONCleaning the screen with inappropriatecleaning products or when dry, may dam-age it.● When cleaning, only press lightly.● Do not use aggressive cleaning productsor that contain solvents. Such productsmay damage the equipment and “darken”the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copyrights

Registered trademarks and licensesCertain terms in this manual bear the symbol® or ™. These symbols indicate that it is atrademark or a registered trademark. Theabsence of this symbol, however, does notnecessarily mean that the term in questioncan be used freely.

Other product names are registered trade-marks or trademarks of the respective rightsholders.

● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. Dolby and the double-D sym-bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.● Android Auto™ is a trademark of GoogleInc.● Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of AppleInc.● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth® SIG, Inc.iPod®, iPad® andiPhone® are trademarks of Apple Inc.● MirrorLink™ and MirrorLink Logo are certi-fied trademarks of Car Connectivity Consor-tium LLC.

● Windows® is a registered trademark of Mi-crosoft Corporation, Redmond, USA.● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technologyand patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS.● This product is protected by certain Micro-soft Corporation industrial and intellectualproperty rights. The use or commercializa-tion of technology of this type outside theconfiguration of this product, without a li-cence from Microsoft or an authorised Mi-crosoft branch is prohibited.

CopyrightAs a general rule, audio and video files storedon data media and audio sources are subjectto intellectual property protection in accord-ance with the national and international pro-visions applicable in each case. Please bearin mind all legal provisions!

Technical data

Central computer with control and displayunit (9,2”)1)

The factory-mounted central computer inthe vehicle includes country-specific com-ponents and software for connectivity andfor the execution of vehicle, comfort and in-fotainment functions.

1) Equipment name: Connect System.160

Introduction

The corresponding indications are shown onthe control and display unit screen and partlyon the instrument panel.■ Capacitive colour screen:■ Using the equipment with:■ Touch zones Touch operation.■ Buttons on the multifunction steering

wheel.■ Approach sensors (driver and passenger

side recognition, gesture control).

Vehicle and comfort functions■ Driver assistance system settings.■ Heating and air conditioning settings.■ Lights and visibility function settings.■ Vehicle comfort settings.■ Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system

Basic equipment:The infotainment system that is suppliedfrom the factory is equipped as follows:■ Speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts).■ Internal amplifier depending on the sys-

tem:■ 4 speakers: 2 x 20 W■ 9 speakers: 5 x 20 W

■ Setting options:■ Equaliser, depending on the system:■ 4 speakers: treble, mid and bass.■ 9 speakers: 5 frequency bands or pre-

defined settings.■ Sound distribution, depending on the

system:■ 4 speakers: Balance (left / right)■ 9 speakers: Balance + Fader (left /

right / front / rear).■ Sound optimisation by zones (valid for

the 9 speaker system):■ Manual (Driver and All)■ Automatic depending on the seats oc-

cupied.

Optional sound systemThe infotainment system can be extendedwith an optional sound system as follows:■ 10 speakers in different locations and with

different power levels (watts).■ External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which

processes the audio signals sent by thecentral computer.

■ Excitation of speaker channels throughclass AB final stages.

■ Audio signal processing in digital internalsignal processor (DSP).

■ Independent subwoofer in the luggagecompartment.

■ Setting options:

■ User equaliser: 5 bands.■ Sound distribution: Balance + Fader

(left / right / front / rear).■ Sound optimisation by zones:■ Manual (Driver, Front and All)

■ Subwoofer volume.

Connectivity

Wi-Fi■ Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n.■ Transfer in 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.■ Three Wi-Fi modes at the same time:■ Tethering (2.4 GHz).■ 2.4 GHz access point.

■ Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fidevices.

■ Internet connection via Wi-Fi:■ Tethering through the customer's

phone.■ Customer access point (clients) in the

vehicle.■ Apple CarPlay and Android Auto over Wi-

Fi.■ Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR

code. »

161

Infotainment system

Bluetooth® profilesThere can be a maximum of two mobile de-vices connected to the Bluetooth® hands-free and a third device connected to theBluetooth® as a music player.

When a mobile phone is connected to thetelephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Blue-tooth® profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): theHFP can be used to manage calls throughthe infotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allowsaudio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Itmay require connecting other profiles formanaging and controlling playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Al-lows phone book contents to be downloa-ded from the mobile telephone.● Message profile (MAP): It allows shortmessages (SMS) to be downloaded andsynchronised.

162

Data transfer

Data transfer

SEAT CONNECT

Introduction

To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be acti-vated online by entering into a SEAT CON-NECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subjectto a temporary use limitation depending onthe country.

Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfoliosoffered by SEAT and individual services canbe modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-vated, renamed and extended, even withoutprior notification.

In https://my.seat you can create the useraccount, see the description of services andmore information.

The execution and availability of the SEATCONNECT services and service portfoliosmay vary depending on the country, as wellas the vehicle, its equipment and connectivi-ty.

Connectivity statuses

(white) Full connectivity, all services active

(grey)Limited connectivity, some servicesmay not be available.

no icon No connectivity, no services available.

SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition orsearch technology does not recognise or of-fer results for all words.

There are SEAT CONNECT services for whichregistration is mandatory and others forwhich it is not mandatory.

Description of servicesBefore running SEAT CONNECT services,read and take into account the description ofthe corresponding services. Descriptions areupdated non-periodically and are availableonline at https://my.seat.

● Always use the most up-to-date version ofthe corresponding service description.

WARNINGIn areas with insufficient mobile phone andGPS coverage, neither emergency calls orphone calls can be made, and data cannotbe transmitted. Change location if possible.

CAUTIONThe vehicle may be damaged by factorsoutside CUPRA’s control. These may bespecifically:● Misuse of mobile terminals● Data loss during transmission● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-cations

● Malicious software on data storage devi-ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones

Services portfolio

The initial service allocation shown here cor-responds to the third generation of SEATCONNECT services and represents the maxi-mum services portfolio. The maximum pos-sible portfolio is only available on some vehi-cle models. During the useful life of the vehi-cle, you can change the assignment shownhere.

After activating the services management inthe infotainment system you can check if thevehicle has services and what they are.

In some countries and in the event of a con-tract renewal, the services offered may becombined differently than indicated here.They may also vary depending on the year ofproduction of the vehicle. The services men-tioned correspond to the third generation ofSEAT CONNECT.

SEAT CONNECT services and functionsthat do not require activationThe following services also work without theactivation of SEAT CONNECT:

● Public emergency call service.● Privacy mode. »

163

Infotainment system

● Legal.

SEAT CONNECT servicesThe SEAT CONNECT services are:● Private emergency call● Public emergency call● Roadside assistance call● Customer support● Service appointment planning● Online system update● Customisation● Activating SEAT CONNECT● Private mode (deactivation of services)● Delete user / Reset factory settings● Remote independent heating● Remote opening● Horn and turn signals● Vehicle status incl. doors and lights● Driving data● Vehicle status report● Anti-theft alarm warning● Zone warning● Speed warning● Online map update● Search for points of interest● Petrol stations● Online traffic information

● Parking lots● Online infotainment system update● Online route calculation● Information on risks● Dictation● Natural voice control for destinations andaddresses● Online radio● Online media● Online route import● Online destination import● Remote auxiliary ventilation● Parking position● Privacy mode● Legal

SEAT CONNECT services for hybrid vehi-clesAvailable only in electric and hybrid vehicles.

● Remote air conditioning● Electrical power manager● Departure times● plus all SEAT CONNECT services in theprevious section ››› page 164 .

SEAT CONNECT individual options● In-Car Applications. These applicationscan be purchased and installed directly in

the infotainment system through the In-Carstore.● Full Link.● Data package. Pay per use data rates forthe use of online functions, for example, 2GB per month.

Note● The public emergency call service isavailable regardless of whether the info-tainment system is logged in.● Customisation and purchase of In-Carapplications require loggint into infotain-ment system, but the activation of the vehi-cle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not nec-essary.

Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S-PIN

Activating SEAT CONNECTThe following steps are necessary for the ac-tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including regis-tration):

● Create a user account at https://my.seator directly through the infotainment systemin the User Management menu.● Place the SEAT CONNECT order and acti-vate it.● Add the vehicle to your user account.

164

Data transfer

● Prove ownership.● Prove your identity. It is only necessary ifyou are to run SEAT CONNECT services rele-vant to security.● You can activate it at https://my.seat or di-rectly through the infotainment system. Toactivate it through the infotainment system,proceed as follows: HOME > User manage-ment > Become a main user.

Follow the rest of the indications and the in-formation shown in the infotainment system.During activation, you may be asked to cre-ate an S-PIN.

Update option

Infotainment yes

SEAT CONNECT portal yes

SEAT CONNECT application yes

More information at https://my.seat/faqs.

S-PINThe S-PIN is a sequence of several digits,which can be selected when completed theSEAT CONNECT registration.

When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and known datesof birth. You can change the S-PIN in theSEAT CONNECT user account in “Accountsettings”.

The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to pro-tect your user profile or to run a SEAT CON-NECT service relevant to the security of yourvehicle.

You must manage this S-PIN with absoluteconfidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN tothird parties, for security reasons you mustchange it immediately.

Ownership and identity accreditation

Become a primary userTo become a main user and thus prove own-ership of the vehicle, you need both of thevehicle’s physical keys. Ownership accredita-tion takes place in the vehicle during regis-tration or, if you already have a SEAT CON-NECT user account, you must log in throughthe infotainment system and then go to Usermanagement

● Switch on the ignition and the infotainmentsystem.● In the infotainment system, register inSEAT CONNECT.● Or: open the menu User management >Settings > Become main user and follow theinstructions.● Press the unlock button on the first vehiclekey.

● Press the unlock button on the second ve-hicle key.

Once the infotainment system has pro-cessed the orders by radiofrequency, the ac-creditation of the ownership will have beencompleted. You can control the current sta-tus in the SEAT CONNECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

Infotainment 2-Key method.

SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible

SEAT CONNECT appli-cation

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)Identity accreditation must be done beforeyou can use SEAT CONNECT services thatare relevant to security, such as the “RemoteOpening” service. Identity accreditation canbe done in two ways:

● In person at a specialised CUPRA dealer orany SEAT dealership.● You can find more information about SEATIdent on the SEAT CONNECT portal athttps://my.seat.

165

Infotainment system

Legal provisions

During the use of SEAT CONNECT services,information is transferred and processed on-line through the vehicle. Such data can alsoprovide (at least indirectly) informationabout the driver in question, for example,driving behaviour and location. As a con-tracting party in the SEAT CONNECT con-tract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure thatwhen your vehicle is used by other drivers(for example, family or friends), data protec-tion and personal rights are respected.Therefore, you must inform drivers in ad-vance that the vehicle transfers and receivesdata online, and that you can access suchdata.

Not taking into account this obligation to in-form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-pants.

Users can manage data sending and trans-fers through the privacy mode at any time.More information at: https://my.seat/faq.

Follow-up services: ask all occupantsThe follow-up services need geographicaland vehicle data to determine whether thevehicle is being used within defined speedranges, where it has been parked or if it is be-ing used in an established geographical area.This information is displayed on the SEATCONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECTapp.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the ve-hicle occupants if they agree with the activa-ted services. If they do not, deactivate theservice in question (if possible) or do not al-low the occupants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: markingIf the vehicle has a factory-assembled con-trol unit that transmits the its current geo-graphical position and speed, the vehicleusually has this GPS marking (e.g., on theroof console). The absence of the markingon the vehicle does not guarantee that thecontrol unit does not transmit the vehicle’scurrent geographical position and speed.

Personal informationCUPRA protects your personal data and onlyuses them, as long as the law allows it or youhave given your consent on the occasion ofa use. You will find detailed information ondata processing in relation to SEAT CON-NECT services in the Privacy Policy, whichyou can access in its corresponding currentversion on the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicleIf another person has left you the vehicle forpermanent use (for example, if you buy aused vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may alreadybe activated and the previous user still hasthe possibility of accessing the data regis-

tered through SEAT CONNECT and controlcertain functions of your vehicle.

In the infotainment system you can check ifyour vehicle is assigned to a person as themain user. In this case, you can register your-self as the main user of the vehicle and thusautomatically delete the previous main user.Alternatively, through the infotainment sys-tem you can directly and permanently deletethe previous user as the main user, as well asput the vehicle in offline mode and thus limitboth the communication of your vehicle withthe SEAT, S.A. data server and the processingof personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services

The following functions are available in theinfotainment system to deactivate and acti-vate SEAT CONNECT services:

● Central deactivation or activation● Individual deactivation or activation

You can rerun the corresponding services af-ter cancelling their deactivation in the info-tainment system.

NoteThe services required by law and their datatransmission, such as the public emergency

166

Data transfer

call system, cannot be disconnected or de-activated.

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEATCONNECT services are met, there may befactors beyond the control of CUPRA that in-terfere with the execution of such services orprevent them. These may be specifically:

● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, soft-ware update and technical expansion of tele-communication equipment, satellites, serv-ers and data banks.● Change of the mobile telephony standardfor the transmission of mobile data by thetelecommunications service provider, forexample, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.● Disconnection of an existing mobile phonestandard by the telecommunications serviceprovider.● Interference, disturbance or interruption inthe reception of the mobile phone and GPSsignal due to aspects such as high-speeddriving, solar storms, meteorological influen-ces, topography, blocking equipment andthe intensive use of mobile phones in the ra-dio cells in question.● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-bile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for exam-ple, in tunnels, confined areas between very

tall buildings, garages, underpasses, moun-tains and valleys.● External information from third party sup-plies available with limitations, incomplete orincorrect, e.g. representations of maps.● Countries and regions where SEAT CON-NECT is not offered.

Service management

Open the settings in Users and go to Privacyand Services. You can do the following in theinfotainment system:

● Check which SEAT CONNECT services arecurrently available in the vehicle.● The number of SEAT CONNECT servicesthat are enabled or disabled.● Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECTservices.

More information at https://my.seat.

Privacy and Services SettingsSEAT CONNECT services can be activatedand deactivated individually. To do this, justcheck the box corresponding to the serviceyou want to activate or deactivate. Use theprivacy mode option if you want to deacti-vate all of the services at the same time.

Privacy modeAllows you to deactivate or activate the serv-ices depending on the selected privacy level.

Tracking

Share location. Main users and co-users can view position data on theSEAT CONNECT portal or app.

Location

Use location. Position, vehicle, anduser data are used for services.

Personal

No location. Only the vehicle data anduser data are used for services.

Incognito

Maximum privacy. Your services aredisabled. Only services required for le-gal reasons use data.

Setting options are not available in all mar-kets or in all vehicle models.

NoteIf you deactivate each and every SEATCONNECT service, the OCU may continueto transmit data.

Full Link

Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and usethe contents and functions that are shown »

167

Infotainment system

on the mobile phone device on the infotain-ment screen.

To do this, the mobile phone device must beconnected with the infotainment systemthrough a USB interface.

Some technologies can also be used byWireless Full Link through the Bluetooth® in-terface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa-ble:● Apple CarPlay™● Apple CarPlay™ Wireless● Android Auto™● Android Auto™ Wireless● MirrorLink®

The availability of the technologies that FullLink includes depends on the country andthe mobile phone device used.

You will find more information on the SEATwebsite (www.seat.com).

Access the Full Link main menuBrowsing the Full Link main menu dependson the infotainment system used.

● View : click on Full link● View : click on Menu > Full Link● OR: press APP.

Configure Wireless Full LinkIn order to use Wireless Full Link, you mustfirst pair the mobile phone device with theinfotainment system. To do this, proceed asfollows:

Connect a mobile phone device for the firsttime.● Unlock the mobile phone device.● Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth® onthe mobile phone device.● Connect the mobile phone device to theinfotainment system using a USB cable or viaBluetooth®.● Access the Full Link main menu, unless itappears automatically.● Select the mobile phone device and thetechnology you want.● Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mo-bile phone device to grant the necessary au-thorisations to the infotainment system.● Disconnect the USB connection and con-nect with the infotainment system again viaWi-Fi or Bluetooth®. Wireless Full Link is nowconfigured.

The pairing has concluded. The connectedmobile phone device can also use WirelessFull Link from now on without the USB con-nection.

If pop-up menus are rejected during theconnection process, Wireless Full Link will

not be available. In this case, CUPRA recom-mends removing the devices in both theiPhone settings and the infotainment sys-tem, and restarting the connection process.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Anydistraction affecting the driver in any waycan lead to an accident and cause injuries.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● Protect the mobile phone device and itsapplications from inappropriate use.● Never carry out modifications to the ap-plications.● Follow instructions in the instructionmanual for the mobile phone device.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of data

168

Data transfer

during transmission or the improper use ofmobile phone devices.

NoteWireless Full Link may not be compatiblewith all technologies.

Applications (apps)

With SEAT Full Link, the display of the con-tents of SEAT applications and other provid-ers installed on mobile phone devices can betransferred to the infotainment screen.

In the case of third-party applications, theremay be compatibility problems.

Applications, their use and the necessarymobile phone connection may be pay peruse.

The offer of applications can be varied anddesigned for a vehicle or a specific country.The content and volume of applications, aswell as the companies that offer them, mayvary. Some applications also depend on theavailability of third-party services.

It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica-tions offered will work on all mobile phonedevices or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by SEAT can bemodified, cancelled, deactivated, reactiva-ted and extended without prior notification.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings

To show more informationTo open the Full Link settings menu

Apple CarPlay™

In order to use Apple CarPlay, the followingrequirements must be met:● The iPhone™ must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.● Voice control (Siri ™) must be active on theiPhone™.● Apple CarPlay™ must be active withoutlimitations in the iPhone™ settings.● The iPhone ™ must be connected to theinfotainment system via a USB connection.Only USB connections with data transmis-sion are suitable for the use of Apple Car-Play™.● The USB cable used must be an originalApple™ cable.

Apple CarPlay™ Wireless: Bluetooth® andWi-Fi must also be activate on the iPhone™.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect an iPhone™, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the iPhone ™.

The requirements must be met to use AppleCarPlay™.

Launch Apple CarPlay™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press Apple CarPlay™ to establish a con-nection with the iPhone™.

Disconnecting● On the Apple CarPlay™ mode, press theSEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

The representation of function buttons onthe screen may vary. »

169

Infotainment system

Special characteristicsDuring an active Apple CarPlay™ connec-tion, the following characteristics are appli-cable:● Bluetooth® connections between theiPhone™ and the infotainment system arenot possible.● If there is an active Bluetooth® connec-tion, it is automatically interrupted.● The phone functions are only availablethrough Apple CarPlay™. The functions de-scribed for the Infotainment system are notavailable.● The connected iPhone™ cannot be usedas a multimedia device in the Media mainmenu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Apple CarPlay™ naviga-tion system at the same time. The last routestarted interrupts the one that was previouslyactive.● Depending on the infotainment systemyou use, on the instrument panel screen youcan view data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control (Siri™) of the connectediPhone™.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible iPhones, certi-fied applications and their availability onthe SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple Car-Play ™ websites, at specialised CUPRA deal-erships or at any SEAT dealership.

Android Auto™

Requirements for Android Auto™In order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:● The mobile phone device, called smart-phone from here on, has to be compatiblewith Android Auto™.● The smartphone must have an AndroidAuto™ application installed.● The smartphone has to be connectedthrough the USB connection with data trans-mission with the infotainment system.

● The USB cable used must be an originalcable provided by the smartphone manufac-turer.

Android Auto™ Wireless: Bluetooth® andWi-Fi also have to be activated on the de-vice.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a smartphone, followthe instructions on the infotainment systemscreen and on the smartphone.

The requirements must be met to use An-droid Auto™.

Launch Android Auto™:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press Android Auto™ to establish a con-nection with the smartphone.

Disconnecting● On the Android Auto™ mode, press theReturn to SEAT icon to access the Full Linkmain menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection.

170

Data transfer

Special characteristicsDuring an active Android Auto™ connection,the following characteristics are applicable:● An active Android Auto™ device can beconnected at the same time via Bluetooth®(HFP profile) with the infotainment system.● It is possible to use the phone’s functionsthrough Android Auto™. If the Android Au-to™ device is connected at the same time viaBluetooth® with the infotainment system,the telephone function of the infotainmentcan also be used.● An active Android Auto™ device cannot beused as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● It is not possible to use the built-in naviga-tion system and the Android Auto™ naviga-tion system at the same time. The last routestarted interrupts the one that was previouslyactive.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

voice control● Press briefly to start voice control usingthe infotainment system.● Press this button for a long time to startvoice control on the connected smart-phone.

Note● The availability of technologies dependson the country and may vary.● You will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible mobile phonedevices, certified applications and theiravailability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)and Android Auto™ websites, at specialisedCUPRA dealerships or at any SEAT dealer-ship.

MirrorLink®

Requirements for MirrorLink®In order to use MirrorLink™, the following re-quirements must be met:● The mobile device must be compatiblewith MirrorLink™.● The mobile phone device must be con-nected to the infotainment system via a USBconnection that is suitable for data transmis-sion.

● The USB cable used must be an originalcable provided by the mobile phone devicemanufacturer.● Depending on the mobile tphone deviceused, a Car-Mode application that is suitablefor using MirrorLink® must be installed.

Establish connectionWhen you first connect a mobile phone de-vice, follow the instructions on the infotain-ment system screen and on the mobilephone device.

The requirements must be met to use Mir-rorLink™.

Launch MirrorLink®:● Press HOME > Full Link to access the FullLink main menu.● OR: press APP to access the Full Link mainmenu.● Press to establish the connection with themobile phone device.

Disconnecting● In the MirrorLink® mode, press the APPicon to access the Full Link main menu.● OR: press to access the MirrorLink®main menu.● Press to interrupt the active connection. »

171

Infotainment system

Special characteristicsDuring an active MirrorLink® connection, thefollowing characteristics are applicable:● An active MirrorLink® device can be con-nected to the infotainment system at thesame time via Bluetooth®.● If the MirrorLink® device is connected tothe infotainment system via Bluetooth®, thetelephone function of the infotainment sys-tem can be used.● You cannot use an active MirrorLink® de-vice as a multimedia device in the Mediamain menu.● On the instrument panel screen you canview data from the Telephone mode.● The instrument panel screen does not dis-play any indication to turn or the Mediamode.● With the multifunction steering wheel youcan accept or reject incoming calls, as well asend an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttonsFunction buttons and their function:

Return the Full Link main menu. Hereyou can end the MirrorLink® connec-tion, connect another mobile phonedevice or select another technology.Press to close the open apps. Thenpress the apps to be closed or the Close

APP

all function button to close all the openapplications.Press to display the mobile phone de-vice screen on the infotainment systemscreen.To open the MirrorLink® settings.Press to return to the MirrorLink® mainmenu.

NoteYou will find information about technicalrequirements, compatible mobile phonedevices, certified applications and theiravailability on the SEAT (www.seat.com)and MirrorLink® websites, at specialisedCUPRA dealerships or at any SEAT dealer-ship.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System

The infotainment system can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 172, Configuration for sharinga connection over WLAN.

The infotainment system can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-

vide Internet to the devices connected tothe hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 173 .

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,CUPRA recommends the use of a flat ratetariff for data transmission. Mobile phoneoperators can provide the relevant infor-mation.● The exchange of data packages may gen-erate additional costs, depending on yourmobile phone rate, particularly if you areabroad (for example, roaming rates).

Configuration for sharing a connec-tion over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Pulse the HOME > button.● Activate the wireless network. To do so,press the WLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) onthe device that is to be connected. If neces-sary, refer to the manufacturer’s instructionmanual.● Activate the mobile device assignment inthe infotainment system. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and acti-vate the checkbox.

172

Data transfer

● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

● Security level: WPA2 encryption automat-ically generates a network key.● Network key: Network key automaticallygenerated. Press the function button tomanually change the network key. The net-work key must have a minimum of 8 charac-ters and a maximum of 63.● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of32 characters).

The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab-lished. To complete the connection, it maybe necessary to enter other data into the de-vice.

Repeat this process to connect other devi-ces.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)3 This depends on the equipment and thecountry in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN).

● Press the WPS button on the WLAN routeruntil the warning light on the router startsflashing. If the WLAN router does not sup-port WPS the network must be configuredmanually.● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button onthe WLAN router until the WLAN light on therouter starts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN de-vice. The wireless (WLAN) connection is es-tablished.

Repeat this process to connect other devi-ces.

Configure Internet access

The infotainment system can use the WLANhotspot of an external device to establish anInternet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the HOME > button; OR accessthe Media mode and press the Settingsmenu.● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLANconnection and check the verification box.

● Press the Find function button and selectthe device you want from the list.● If necessary, enter the network key of thedevice in the infotainment system and con-firm with OK.

Manual settings:● To manually enter the network settings ofan external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is estab-lished. To complete the connection, it maybe necessary to enter other data into the de-vice.

NoteDue to the large number of devices on themarket, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

173

Infotainment system

Infotainment operation

voice control*

Introduction

The voice control works both online* andoffline taking into account what is indicatedin page 174, Languages available depend-ing on the market. In online* mode, com-mands are recorded more accurately, asmore data is available.

Voice control understands questions and ex-pressions without having to learn com-mands. Commands can be formulated freelyand can be colloquial. You will find proposalsfor commands in the infotainment system.

Functions are reduced in offline mode.

Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle cancause malfunctions, as well as confusingphrases and answers.

Languages available depending on themarketOnline* and offline: German, American Eng-lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanishand Czech. These languages have advancedfunctions such as Online Commands, airconditioning control, natural interaction, etc.

The other languages of the infotainment sys-tem do not offer Online Commands, air con-ditioning control or natural interaction.

Requirements● Online* and offline: voice control with thecorresponding infotainment mounted on thevehicle.● Online* current SEAT CONNECT Plus con-tract active.

Note● Voice control only recognises commandsin the language that is set in the infotain-ment system.● Test the voice control with the vehiclestopped before starting to move to familiar-ise yourself with its operation.

Activation word and commands

Voice control activation wordsIf you have connected the voice control viathe activation word, the connected infotain-ment responds with How can I help you?. Itthen scans the words spoken in the vehicleafter the activation word.

Voice control starts when the infotainmentrecognises the activation word.

Connect and disconnect the activationword● In HOME press Settings > Voice control >Activate/ deactivate activation word.

Activation word: Hola Hola

CommandsFor voice control to recognise commandsreliably, bear in mind the tips for the com-mands to work properly.

Tips for the commands to work correctly:● Pronounce clearly. Confusing commandsare not recognised. Talk in a normal tone ofvoice. Speak a little louder if you are drivingat high speed.● Avoid outside noises. Open windows anddoors can interfere with voice control.● Avoid other secondary noises, such asconversations in the vehicle. Do not directthe air flow from the outlets towards the mi-crophone or the interior lining of the roof.● Do not use a very strong accent or dialec-tal.● Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises thewords pronounced.

174


Note● When the activation word is disconnec-ted, the infotainment system cannot be ac-tivated by means of the activation word.Voice control is still available via the but-ton on the multifunction steering wheel.● Availability depends on country andequipment.● Depending on the content of the phonebook and to ensure reliable recognition ofthe names of the phone book, it may beuseful to change the order of the first andlast name of the contact in question.

Start and stop voice control

Depending on the equipment, you can startvoice control in different ways.

Start voice control● Voice control activation: say the word thatactivates voice control.● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button .

The voice control ends automatically, if youuse infotainment functions, if the parkingsystem is activated or by incoming calls.

In some cases you can also start voice con-trol of the connected mobile phone device,by pressing and holding the voice controlbutton.

Manually ending voice controlVoice control can be cancelled with theCancel command.

● Multifunction steering wheel: press thevoice control button twice in a row, or along press.

175

Infotainment system

Radio/Multimedia

Radio mode

Fig. 132 Schematic representation: Radio view

In Radio mode you can tune in the availableradio stations in different frequency bandsand memorise your favourites on the presetbuttons to access them quickly.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry. In certain countries, frequencybands may stop broadcasting or not be avail-able again.

Access the RADIO menu● Press HOME > ››› Fig. 132 .

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Online* functions in Radio modeOnline* functions in Radio mode are onlyavailable under the following conditions:

● SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plusequipment.● You have an active SEAT CONNECT useraccount.● Add the vehicle is assigned to your user ac-count.

● You have a corresponding data packageacquired from the In-Car store or have a datavolume for your own mobile phone devicevia Wi-Fi access point.

Note● For streaming services you need to havean account with the provider in question.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.Additional electrical equipment connectedto the vehicle can cause interference in thereception of the radio signal and noise inthe speakers.

176


● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.

Radio equipment and symbols

The functions, as well as the types of recep-tion and frequency bands available dependon the equipment and the country.

● AM* tuner.● Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna).● Summarised FM station list.● Fusion of DAB* and FM stations into onelist.● Fusion of all stations stored in preset but-tons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite sta-tions.● Station logos.● DAB presentation (slideshow). Images thatare emitted sequentially.● Online* radio.

Universal symbols in Radio modeTo select the desired AM frequencyband.

To select the desired FM/DAB fre-quency band.

To select the type of Online*radio reception.

AM

FM/DAB

Online radio*

Next to the name of the station, moni-toring of active traffic information sta-tions (TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency bandTo display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the FM frequency. Onlypossible when the summary station listis disconnected.DAB not available.DAB stations support presentations (sli-deshow).

Symbols on the AM frequency bandManually updating the station list.To display the frequency band for man-ual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Online* radio modeShow station selection.Open text search.Show the last online radio stationsheard.Show the 100 most heard online radiostations.Show available online radio podcasts.

Show online radio stations, which origi-nate from the desired country.Show online radio stations, whichbroadcast in the desired language.

TP

Show online radio stations whose pro-gramme belongs to the desired musicalgenre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a station

Select the frequency bandBefore selecting a station you have to selecta frequency band or a type of reception. Dif-ferent stations are available depending onthe frequency band selected or the type ofreception.

The types of reception and frequency bandsavailable depend on the equipment and thecountry.

● Select the frequency band or type of re-ception: AM*, FM/DAB, FM (for devices thatdo not have DAB), Online* radio.

Search and select a stationYou can select radio stations in differentways. The options vary depending on thefrequency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM and FM)● Activate the frequency band.● Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre-quency band and release it when you reachthe frequency band you want. »

177

Infotainment system

● OR: press on a point on the frequencyband. The cursor will automatically jump tothe corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Select from the station list (AM andFM/DAB)The station list shows the stations that arecurrently tunable. In the AM frequency band,you may have to update the station list if youare no longer in the area where you last ac-cessed the station list. In the FM/DAB fre-quency band, the station list is automaticallyupdated.

● Open the station list● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned. In the case ofFM/DAB and if the station is available, thebest quality reception is automatically selec-ted.

Search and filter stations (Online* radio)In Online Radio mode, stations can be fil-tered by categories and can be searched bytext.

● Open the station list.● Select the category by which the stationsare to be filtered.

● OR: press to start the text search. Theinput field is displayed.● Enter the name of the station you want.The list of the stations found is updated whileentering the text.● Press the station you want.

The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)In SCAN mode the stations are automaticallytuned in a sequential manner and each ofthem is played for approx. 5 seconds.

● To start the SCAN mode, under Settingspress SCAN.

SCAN mode starts and the station currentlytuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it isa SCAN function button.

● To select a station press SCAN.

SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned.The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttonsYou can store up to 36 stations of differentfrequency bands and reception types as fa-vourites using the preset buttons.

● Tune the station you want.● Access the preset buttons.

● Press the preset button and keep it press-ed until the station is stored.● OR: press the station on the station list andkeep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis-played.● Press the preset button.

The station is stored in the selected presetbutton.

If a station was already stored in the presetbutton, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

Traffic information (TP)The TP function monitors the announce-ments of a station with traffic informationand automatically reproduces them in theRadio mode or in the multimedia playbackthat is active. To do this, you have to be ableto tune into a station with traffic information.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic information from other sta-tions (EON).

In the AM frequency band or in the Multime-dia mode, a station with traffic information inthe background is automatically tuned whileit is possible to tune into a station with trafficinformation.

178


If no station with traffic information can betuned in, the device automatically searchesfor stations with tunable traffic information.

Stations with traffic information are not avail-able in all countries.

Activating and deactivating the TP func-tion● In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, pressSettings > Traffic station (TP).

Online* radioOnline radio is a type of reception for Inter-net radio stations and podcasts that are in-dependent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks toInternet transmission, reception is not limi-ted to the region.

Online radio is only available through the In-ternet connection of the active infotainmentsystem. The use of online radio can generateexpenses due to the transmission of datafrom the Internet.

● In Online radio mode, press and set the au-dio quality to high or low to tune the onlineradio.

Station logosIn the case of some frequency bands, stationlogos may already be pre-installed in the in-fotainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settingsthe automatic selection of station logos is

activated, station logos are automatically as-signed to the stations.

In the Online radio mode, the infotainmentsystem accesses the station logos of the on-line database and automatically assignsthem to the stations

Assign station logos manually● In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos.● Press on the icon and then select thestation to which a station logo is to be as-signed.● Select the station logo. If desired, repeatthe same process with other stations.● OR, via the menu Settings > Station logos.

179

Infotainment system

Media Mode

Fig. 133 Schematic representation: Multimedia view

In Media mode you can play multimedia filesfrom data media and streaming servicesthrough the infotainment system.

Depending on the equipment, the followingdata media can be used:

● USB storage support (for example, a USBstick, a mobile phone connected vai USB).● Bluetooth® device (for example, a mobilephone or a tablet).

Depending on the equipment, the followingtypes of multimedia files can be played:

● Audio files.● Video files (depends on the system).

You can also use streaming services. Theavailability of streaming services depends onthe equipment and the country.

To use streaming services you need to haveyour own user account in the streamingservice in question.

Access the MEDIA menu● Press HOME > ››› Fig. 133 .

Access the settings● Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data mediaData media may not work if they have beenexposed to high temperatures or have been

damaged. Please bear in mind the manufac-turer’s indications.

Quality differences between data media pro-duced by different manufacturers can causemultimedia playback malfunctions.

Incorrect configuration on a data media maycause the data media to be unreadable.

Playlists only specify a playback order and re-fer to the storage location of the multimediafiles within the folder structure. In a playlistthere are no multimedia files saved. To play aplaylist, multimedia files have to be found inthe storage places of the data media towhich the playlist refers.

180


Equipment features. Audio, multimediaand connectivity:● Multimedia playback and control via Blue-tooth®.● Audio playback in these formats: AAC,ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA.● Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4,DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264(.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video10 (.wmv, .asf).● Playlists on any type of device.● Multimedia streaming (online*).● Multimedia search.

NoteCUPRA assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Select and play a multimedia source

Select multimedia sourceBefore playing multimedia files you must firstconnect a multimedia source.

To use streaming services you must be con-nected to the Internet.

● Connect an external multimedia source.

● Select the connected media source to beused for playback.

Playing audio and video filesYou can search and play multimedia filesfrom an available multimedia source in dif-ferent ways.

Search in the folder structureMultimedia files can be catalogued by cate-gories (for example, album, artist, title). In MyMultimedia this category view is always dis-played. The classic folder structure of indi-vidual USB data media is also found in MyMultimedia.

● Activate the folder structure.● The folder structure of the selected multi-media source is displayed. When My multi-media is selected, the categories (music,videos, playlists) and connected multimediasources are displayed first.● Search for the title you want in the folderstructure.● Or: press to start the text search. The in-put field is displayed.● Enter the name of the desired title. The listof the titles found is updated while enteringthe text.● Press the desired title.● If at the beginning of the playback your se-lection is in a folder of a multimedia source,

the multimedia files that are in it are alsoadded to the playback.● If a playlist is played, all available titles inthe playlist are added to the playback.● Close your selection with .

Select favouritesIn favourites you can save titles, music gen-res, artists and albums individually for play-back.

● Access favourites .● Press the favourite you want.

Depending on your selection, all the titlesbelonging to the favourite are added to theplayback.

Configure streaming servicesDepending on the equipment you can usestreaming services directly through the info-tainment system. For this you need to have apremium user account of the streamingservice in question and you have to log inwith it in the infotainment system. You alsoneed to be connected to the Internet.

● Select Streaming as the multimediasource.● A list of available streaming services is dis-played.● Select the streaming service you want. »

181

Infotainment system

● Follow the steps indicated by the infotain-ment system.● The streaming service is added to the listof multimedia sources as a new functionbutton.

Save favouritesOnly multimedia files in My multimedia ofthe infotainment system can be saved as fa-vourites. You can save up to a maximum of30 titles, albums, artists and music genres in-dividually as favourites.

● Start playback.● Access favourites.● Tap a favourite that is not assigned.● Or: click on an existing favourite and pressand hold for approx. 3 seconds.● Select from the selection list: Title, Album,Artist, Musical genres.

● Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previ-ously selected favourite. If the favourite wasalready assigned, the previously saved fa-vourite is overwritten.

The selectable options in the selection listdepend on the data attached to the multi-media file. If the music genre is not indicatedin the music files, for example, you cannotsave the music genre as favourite.

If a video file is playing, only that video canbe saved as favourite.

Playing entertainment content in theinfotainment system

Depending on the infotainment system, mu-sic and videos can be played.

Video modeWhen in video mode, a video can be playedon the infotainment screen if this is stored ona data media, in My Multimedia or is sourcedfrom a streaming service. In this case, thevideo sound is played through the vehicle'sspeakers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle isstopped. When the vehicle is in motion, theinfotainment screen turns off. The sound ofthe video can still be heard.

A stable Internet connection is required forplayback from a streaming service. In thiscase, telephony costs may be generated.

182


Navigation*

Introduction

Fig. 134 Schematic representation: Navigation view

A global satellite system determines the cur-rent position of the vehicle and the sensorsmounted on the vehicle analyse the routestaken. All measured values and possible traf-fic events are compared with the availablemaps to allow optimal navigation to the des-tination.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-resentations will guide you to your destina-tion.

Navigation management is carried out onthe screen.

Depending on the country, some functionsof the infotainment system will not be availa-

ble on the screen when travelling above acertain speed. It is not a malfunction, but isdue to compliance with legislation.

Navigation announcementsNavigation announcements are acoustic in-dications for driving referred to the currentroute.

The type and frequency of navigation an-nouncements depend on the driving situa-tion, for example, starting the guide to thedestination, driving on the motorway or on aroundabout and the settings.

If the exact destination cannot be reachedbecause, for example, it is in a non-digitisedarea, indications relating to the address andthe distance to the destination are displayedon the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re-ceive information about reported trafficcongestion on the route. An additional navi-gation announcement is provided if theroute is recalculated due to traffic conges-tion.

While a navigation announcement is playing,its volume can be adjusted. The following »

183

Infotainment system

navigation announcements provided will beplayed with the newly adjusted volume.

Limitations during navigationIf the infotainment system cannot receivedata from GPS satellites, for example, in atunnel or in an underground garage, naviga-tion continues using the vehicle's sensors.

In areas that are not digitised or are only par-tially digitised on the infotainment memory,the infotainment system will still attempt toprovide route guidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-tion data, it may not be possible to deter-mine the exact position of the vehicle. Thismay mean that navigation is not as precise asusual.

Roads and streets are subject to constantchange (e.g. new roads, road works, roadsclosed to traffic, changes to street namesand building numbers). If the navigation datais obsolete, this may lead to errors or inac-curacies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation mapTo allow an optimal view, you can also man-age the navigation map with additional fingermovements.

Move the map (tip: use your index finger).● Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in the view (tip: use your index fin-ger).● To increase the view in a certain position,double-click on the map.

Zoom out the view (tip: use your index andmiddle fingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time.

Change view (tip: use your index finger).● Press twice on the map and keep your fin-ger pressed on the screen.● To zoom out the view of the map, moveyour finger upwards. To zoom in the view ofthe map, move your finger downwards.

Change view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To zoom out the view of the map, moveone finger towards the other. To zoom in theview of the map, move one finger away fromthe other.

Tilt the view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and horizontal to each other,keep them pressed.● To tilt the view of the map forward, moveyour fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the

map backward, move your fingers down-wards.

Rotate view (tip: use your index and middlefingers).● Press on the map with both fingers at thesame time and keep them pressed.● To rotate the map view, turn your fingersclockwise anticlockwise.

Saved dataThe infotainment system saves certain data,for example, frequent routes and positiondata, to make the entry of the destinationmore agile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data● Press Settings > Basic function settings >Delete and then OK

WARNINGSelect the settings, enter the destinationand the modifications for navigation onlywith the vehicle at a standstill.

Note● If a detour is passed during route guid-ance, navigation may recalculate the route.● The quality of the navigation recommen-dations given by the Infotainment systemdepends on the navigation data availableand any reported traffic congestions.

184


● Navigation announcements are not emit-ted if the sound is muted in the infotain-ment system.

Navigation functions and symbols

NavigationNavigation functions depend on the equip-ment and country.

Functions● Entering destination and route calculation(offline and online*).● Indication of two navigation maps at thesame time (screen and instrument panel*).● Update of online* maps.● Predictive navigation.● 3D urban maps.● Online* traffic information● Dynamic POIs (points of interest)

Symbols on the mapThe buttons and indications depend on thesettings and the current driving situation.

Symbols for traffic events and points of inter-est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for ex-ample, petrol stations, train stations or inter-esting stopovers, provided navigation hassuch data ››› page 188 .

Current positionSearch for destinations.Destinations along the route.Final destinationHome addressWork addressFavourite destinationsAdditional window with more options.Additional window with route options.

Centre the map on the current position.

Change view: 2D oriented to the north,or 2D oriented to the direction of travel,or 3D to the direction of travel.Information about the current routeguidance.Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window● To open the additional window, press .

Repeat the last navigation announce-ment.Volume of navigation announcements.Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Nightmode.Offer new guidance routes.

|

Other symbolsEntering the detailed destination for anaddress.Search for destinations.Frequent destinations.Last destinations.Favourite destinationsBack

Symbols in the route detailsCurrent position.Destination of the current guidance.

POI symbols (points of interest)POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data.

Click on the desired POI (point of interest) tostart a route guidance ››› page 186 .

Petrol station.Parking lot.Tourist information offices.Train station.Restaurant.

Traffic information.POIs (points of interest) are shown on themap, provided the navigation has said data››› page 188. »

185

Infotainment system

Click on a traffic event to open an additionalwindow with further details ››› page 188 .

Slow traffic.

Traffic jam.

Accident.

Broken down vehicle.

Slippery surface (ice or snow).

Road closed to traffic.

Slippery road hazard.

Danger.

Road works.

Strong wind.

Reduced visibility.

Navigation data

The Infotainment system is equipped with abuilt-in navigation data memory. Dependingon the country, the necessary navigation da-ta may already be pre-installed.

To provide correct route guidance and makethe most of the functions offered, the info-tainment system should be updated on aregular basis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors dur-ing navigation. Current routes cannot betraced or the route guidances will lead tomistaken destinations.

Ensure navigation data is updated at alltimes.

Online* updating of navigation dataThe navigation data of the regions throughwhich you travel frequently is automaticallyupdated in the background if the Internetconnection is established and the privacysettings are valid.

● With the ignition switched on, the naviga-tion data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation dataCurrent navigation data for large regions, forexample Western Europe, can be downloa-ded from www.seat.com and stored on USBdata devices. Navigation through USB datadevices is not possible.

● Download the navigation data to a USB da-ta device.● Turn on the ignition of the vehicle.● Connect the USB data device to the info-tainment system. Navigation data is auto-matically updated in the background.

The map version is displayed in HOME > >System information.

WARNINGIf you update the navigation data manuallywhile driving, it may cause accidents withserious injuries.● Update the navigation data only with thevehicle at a standstill.

NoteAutomatic update of the navigation data issubject to the privacy settings. In “Incogni-to” mode, no update is carried out.

Start route guidance

Depending on the country and equipment,different functions are available to enter des-tinations.

The different functions for entering destina-tions are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu● Press HOME > .

Select the destination and start navigationPress .Select the desired destination. You canchose from Frequent destinations, Last destinations and Favouritedestinations.

1.2.

186


OR: press and enter the address inthe input screen.OR: detailed address.Press Start.

Frequent destinationsThe destination synopsis uses recorded datato propose possible destinations.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Select the desired destination. Theroute guidance starts automatically.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and holdthe desired destination for a few seconds.

Last destinationsNavigation saves the last destinations tomake them available for a route guidance.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Press the desired destination.Press Start.

Quick start: for a quick start, press and holdthe desired destination for a few seconds.

Favourite destinationsSave up to 20 destinations as favourites.

3.

1.2.

1.2.3.

To save a destination as a favourite press in the split screen when entering the desti-nation.

Select the destination and start navigationPress and then .Press the desired destination.Press Start.

NoteEnter the destination as accurately as pos-sible. If you enter a destination incorrectly,the route guidance will not be able to startor it will guide you to an incorrect destina-tion.

Start route guidance by selecting fromthe map

The navigation map includes active areas atmany points that are suitable for entering thedestination. To do this, press the desired po-sition or place on the map. If there is mapdata at this point, you can start a route guid-ance.

Whether it is possible to enter the destina-tion through the navigation map depends onthe state of the data and it is not possible forall positions.

To start “offroad navigation”, press an emptyarea without position data.

1.2.3.

Start navigation● Press .● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigationmap can be used by means of additional fin-ger movements ››› page 184 .● Press the desired destination on the map.● Press Route.

Offroad navigation*“Offroad navigation” calculates routes to se-lected destination points using unknown da-ta. When a destination point is outside theknown roads or position data, navigationfinds the route to the next point of theknown road and completes the path to thenext destination point with a direct connec-tion.

Start navigation● Move the view on the map until the desiredposition can be selected. The navigationmap can be used by means of additional fin-ger movements ››› page 184 .● Press on any point on the map without po-sition data.● Press Route.

187

Infotainment system

Start route guidance using contactdetails

Start route guidance with the saved addressdata of a contact. Contacts saved withoutaddress data cannot be used for route guid-ance.

Start navigation● Press .● Press on the contact you want.● Press Route.

NoteIf the address details of a contact are obso-lete, the route guidance will neverthelesstake you to the registered address. Checkthat the contact address is updated.

Traffic information

The infotainment system receives detailedtraffic information automatically if the Inter-net connection is established. This informa-tion is shown with symbols and highlightingthe road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidentsTraffic incidents, for example, traffic jams orcongested traffic, are shown on the naviga-tion map using symbols.

With an active route guidance, traffic inci-dents that are on the current route areshown in the route details. Such traffic inci-dents can be avoided ››› page 188 .

Hazard informationHazard information is shown on the naviga-tion map with symbols in the same way astraffic incidents. In this case, the source ofthis information is another vehicle that hasdetected the hazard and has uploaded theinformation to the service provider.

The following hazards are displayed: acci-dent, broken down vehicle and slippery roadsurface.

Traffic flow indicationThe navigation map shows traffic flow ac-cording to current traffic events, highlightingthe road network in colour.

● Orange: Slow traffic.● Red: Traffic jam.

NoteTraffic information receipt is subject to theprivacy settings. In maximum Privacymode, no traffic information is received.Tracking or Location level setting is neces-sary.

Function descriptions

Route detailsThe route details contain information on allincidents, for example, the starting point,stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destina-tion, provided the navigation has such data.

If you press on an incident, an additional win-dow opens providing more options. Theavailable options depend on the incidentand the current settings.

Open and close the route details● To open, press | or swipe it.

● To close, press | or swipe it.

Edit route guidanceTo edit route guidance, move the stopoversto the destination in the TripView view.

● Hold the desired destination pressed untilit is visibly highlighted.● Move the destination to the desired posi-tion.● Remove your finger from the screen. Theroute will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidentsThe details of the route show the currenttraffic incidents if the navigation has such

188


data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing routedetails ››› page 188 .

● Press on a traffic event.● Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screenWhen handling navigation functions, an ad-ditional window with other options mayopen. Possible options depend on the func-tion being used.

Close the additional screen● Press on an empty area outside the addi-tional window.● OR: press .● OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map Show what is selected on the map.

Add stopover Add a stopover to the route guid-ance.

Direct route Starts direct route guidance.

Delete Delete a stopover from the routeguidance.

Functions in the additional window:

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re-calculate.

Stopping routeguidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage patternWhen the vehicle is in motion, navigationsaves routes and destinations used to auto-matically generate destination proposals.Destinations are learned based on the timeof day and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at thesame time. The proposed routes may be dif-ferent from the routes of the normal routeguidance.

If one of the proposed destinations is selec-ted, the guide to that destination is started.

The route guidance follows the selectedroute until the vehicle deviates from it. Inthat case, the route is recalculated and takes

you back along the most direct path to theinitially selected destination.

Important traffic jams are taken into accountin the route guidance, and are avoided if al-ternative routes are available, provided navi-gation has such data.

You can activate and deactivate the functionwhenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage patternThe setting is in the corresponding naviga-tion menu > Basic function settings.

● To activate the function, activate Learn us-age pattern.● To disable the function, disable Learn us-age pattern.● To delete saved data, press Delete usagepattern.

189

Infotainment system

Telephone interface

Introduction

Fig. 135 Schematic representation: Phone view

You can use the telephone interface to con-nect your mobile to the infotainment systemand operate phone functions through it. Thesound is played through the vehicle's speak-ers.

You can connect up to two mobile phonedevices simultaneously to the infotainmentsystem.

High speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and a noisy ambience (even outside ofthe vehicle), as well as the quality of recep-tion can all affect the quality of a telephoneconversation in the vehicle.

Note● As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex-ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec-essary once. You can restore the deviceconnection via Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi withthe infotainment system whenever youwant without having to pair the deviceagain.● The availability of some telephone func-tions will depend on the mobile phone con-nected to the infotainment system.

Telephone interface equipment andsymbols

Equipment features● Hands-free function.● Use up to two phones at the same time.● Phone book with a maximum of 5,000contacts.● Text message functions via Bluetooth®*:reading Text message, writing Text message(including templates), Text message play-back, message history.

190


● E-mail functions via Bluetooth®*: readingE-mail, writing E-mail.● Connection to wireless charging option.● Connection to the microphone mountedon the vehicle.

Symbols in the main menuContacts.List of incoming and outgoing calls.Enter telephone number.

Text messages (SMS and emails).*Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for callsThe symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the fore-ground.End or reject a call.Open contact list.Enter telephone number.

Mute the sound of the hands-freeHold call.Continue call.Start conference call.Pass call to private modeMake an emergency call.

Get help in case of breakdown.Obtain information on the CUPRAbrand and selected additional servicesrelated to traffic and your travel.Voice mail.

Call list symbols● To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call.Outgoing call.Missed call.Telephone number (company).Telephone number (private).Mobile telephone number (company).

Mobile telephone number (private).Fax (private).Fax.

Symbols for text messages*The symbols may be different depending onthe infotainment system.

● To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input››› page 174.Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations

Switch off the mobile telephone and the tel-ephone interface in places with a risk of ex-plosion. These places are not always clearlymarked. They include, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liq-uefied gas (such as propane or butane).● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder.● All other places where the vehicle engineor telephone must be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion!

NoteIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile phones is forbidden, itmust be switched off at all times. The radia-tion produced by the mobile phone whenswitched on may interfere with sensitivetechnical and medical equipment, possiblyresulting in malfunction or damage to theequipment.

191

Infotainment system

Pair, connect and manage

Requirement for pairing:

● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.● Bluetooth® is activated on the infotain-ment system.● Depending on the mobile device, it will benecessary to have the Bluetooth® menuopen or activate the Visibility option so thatthe device is visible from the infotainmentsystem.

Pair a mobile phone device suitable for tel-ephony with the infotainment system to usethe telephone interface functions. On thefirst connection, the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system. Doingso saves a user profile ››› page 192 .

The pairing can take a few minutes. Thefunctions available depend on the mobilephone device used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device● Open the list of available Bluetooth® devi-ces on the mobile phone device and selectthe name of the infotainment system.● Please note and, if necessary, confirm themessages that appear on the mobile phonedevice and on the infotainment system. If thepairing was successful, the phone data issaved in the user profile.

● Optional: confirm the data transfer mes-sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connectionTo use the functions of the telephone inter-face, there must be at least one mobilephone device connected to the infotain-ment system. If there are several mobilephone devices connected to the infotain-ment system, you can switch between activeand passive connections. To use the tele-phone interface with the desired mobilephone device, establish the active connec-tion with the infotainment system.

Difference between connection types

PrimaryThe mobile phone device is paired andconnected. The functions of the tele-phone interface are performed with thedata of said mobile phone device.

SecondaryThe mobile phone device is paired andconnected. Calls can be managed butthe phone book, messages or otherfunctions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored inthe infotainment system, even if they are notcurrently connected.

Connect a mobile phone deviceRequirement: the mobile phone device ispaired with the infotainment system.● Bluetooth® is activated on the mobilephone device.

Establish an active connectionRequirement: several mobile phone devicesare connected to the infotainment system atthe same time.● Select the desired mobile phone devicefrom the drop-down menu. All other mobilephone devices are automatically in the pas-sive connection.

User profilesFor each of the paired mobile phone devicesan individual user profile is automatically cre-ated. In the user profile, data from the mo-bile phone device is stored, for example,contact details or settings. A maximum offour user profiles can be saved in the info-tainment system at the same time.

WARNINGIf you perform the pairing while driving, itcould cause an accident or injury.● Perform pairing only with the vehicle at astandstill.

192


Note● In the pairing of some mobile phone de-vices, a PIN number is shown on the screenof the mobile phone device. Enter thatnumber in the infotainment system to com-plete the pairing.● While the infotainment system is in theKnown mobile phones menu, the wirelesscharging function is disabled. When youexit this menu, the wireless charging func-tion is activated again.

Basic and Comfort Telephony

Depending on the equipment, two types oftelephone interface can be used:

● Basic telephone interface.● Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interfaceThe Basic telephone interface uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile for transmission. This in-terface allows the use of telephone functionsthrough the infotainment system and play-back through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interfaceLike the Basic telephone interface, the Com-fort telephone interface also uses the Blue-tooth® HFP profile.

The Comfort phone interface can be equip-ped with the wireless charging function››› page 194.

In order to use the functions of the wirelesscharging function, you have to place a suita-ble mobile phone device correctly in thestorage compartment. The mobile phonedevice will then connect to the vehicle an-tenna. This improves the reception andsound quality of calls.

To call

Open the telephone interface● Press HOME > .

Make a callSelect a phone number to start a call. Differ-ent functions are available for selecting aphone number:

ContactsIf a contact has several registered phonenumbers you have to select one.

● Press and press a number on the list tostart the call.● OR: press and enter the contact name inthe input field to search for it. Press on thecontact to start the call.

● OR: press a favourite in the telephone in-terface main menu to start the call.

CallsThe telephone interface shows the call list ofthe mobile telephone device. Start a callfrom the call list.

● Press > All and press a number on thelist to start the call.● OR: press and filter the call list entries(for example, missed calls or dialled num-bers). In filtered list, press a number to startthe call.

DialManually enter a phone number to start acall. While entering the phone number, con-tacts that match that number are shown onthe infotainment screen.

● Press and enter the phone number.● Press to start the call

The last call is dialled by pressing and holdingthe button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Send messages*

Depending on the mobile phone device andthe infotainment system used, you can send »

193

Infotainment system

and receive SMS and e-mails through the tel-ephone interface.

Send an SMS● Press > Text message > Enter new mes-sage and enter the message on the screen.● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Send an e-mail● Press > E-mail > Enter new messageand enter the message on the screen.● Enter the contact you want in the searchbar.● To send the message press OK.

Phone book, favourites and speed dialbuttons

In the first connection of a telephone withthe infotainment system, the phone book issaved in the infotainment system. It may benecessary to confirm the data transmissionon the mobile phone.

Each time the phone is reconnected, thephone book is updated.

If conference calls are supported, the phonebook can be accessed during a call. If thereis a saved image for a contact, it can be dis-played in the list next to the entry.

FavouritesA speed dial button can be assigned to aphone book favourite up to a maximum ofsix. If there is a registered photo saved to thecontact, it is shown on the speed dial button.

All speed dial buttons have to be manuallyedited and will be assigned to a user profile.

Assign the speed dial button● In the Favourites menu, press the + but-ton, then open the phone book to select acontact as a favourite. If the contact has sev-eral phone numbers, press on the number inthe list.

Edit the speed dial button● To edit or delete a favourite contact presson the icon in the Favourites menuscreen. You can delete one or more favour-ites.

Call a favourite● Press the assigned speed dial button.

NoteFavourites are not updated automatically. Ifyou change a contact's phone number, youhave to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box*

Fig. 136 In the centre console: pad for the mobilephone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes the WirelessCharger functionality.

(Wireless Charger)The Wireless Charger allows mobile deviceswith Qi1) technology to be charged without acable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

194


● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 136››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device supports Qitechnology, check your phone's user manualor visit the CUPRA website.

WARNING● The mobile phone may heat up due tothe wireless charging. Think about this be-fore you pick it up, and take care when re-moving it.● There must be no metallic or other ob-jects between the mobile phone and thehousing, to prevent the functionality of theConnectivity Box from being affected.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiinductive charging interface standard forproper operation.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.

● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless charging.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, it will be charged by themeans specified by the manufacturer.

Multimedia

USB port

Fig. 137 Centre console: USB port.

Fig. 138 Rear part of the centre console: USBconnectors with power outlet function.

The USB port can be found in the storagecompartment area of the front centre con-sole ››› Fig. 137 .

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 138.

195

Driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping the en-gine

Ignition and start button

Fig. 139 Starter button

The engine can be started with a start button(Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a val-id key inside the vehicle in the area of thefront or rear seats, or on the centre console.

The button is found at the bot-tom of the centre console or, depending on

the version, on the multi-function steeringwheel.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access››› page 92system, the engine can also bestarted with the key in the luggage compart-ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/offIf you only want to switch on the ignition(without starting the engine), briefly pressthe start button once without pressing thebrake pedal or the clutch pedal ››› .

The push-button text flasheslike a heartbeat when the system is ready forthe ignition to be turned on or off1).

Automatic ignition disconnectionIf the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the keywith them but leaving the ignition on, the ig-nition does not switch off automatically. Theignition is switched off by pressing the lockbutton on the remote control or by press-ing the sensor surface on the door lever››› Fig. 77.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there isenough charge in the battery). If the driverlocks the vehicle or manually turns off thelight, the side light goes out.

Engine restart featureIf no key is detected inside the vehicle afterthe engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-onds to restart it. A warning will display onthe dash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key inside thevehicle.

1) Valid for versions with the start button on thecentre console.

196

Start and driving

WARNINGWhen switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-authorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignition andoperate any of the electrical equipment.

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always discon-nect the ignition and, if appropriate, takeinto account the instructions on the screenof the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the engine off and the ignition on, thevehicle battery might be discharged and itmight not be possible to start the engine.● If during the STOP phase you press the button, the ignition is switch-

ed off and the push-button flashes1).

● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”;the button will flash1).

Starting the engine

● Vehicles with automatic transmission: putthe selector lever in P or N, press the brakepedal and keep it pressed in this position un-til the engine starts.● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 139 ; do notpress the accelerator. There needs to be avalid key inside the vehicle for the engine tostart. After starting the engine, the lighting ofthe button remains fixed indi-cating that the engine is running1).● Once the engine starts, release the start-up button.● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,perform an emergency start ››› page 199 .

WARNINGDo not keep the engine running in confinedspaces, as there is a risk of poisoning.● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-

ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-ness and death.

WARNINGDo not get out of the vehicle with the en-gine running, especially if a gear is engag-ed. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNINGNever use cold start sprays, they could ex-plode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to restart the engine im-mediately after switching it off.● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine, asthis could cause engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps the »


197

Driving

engine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Note● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.

Turning off the engine

● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .● Move the selector lever to the P position.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Briefly press the start-up button››› Fig. 139.

Emergency disconnectionIf the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› in Ignition and start button onpage 197.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to pressthe break pedal harder to brake the vehicle.● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.

WARNINGAlways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, theignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-

ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.● If the engine has been driven at highspeed for a prolonged period of time, itmay overheat when switched off. To avoiddamage, allow the engine to run for ap-proximately two minutes in neutral beforeswitching it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

In the key there is a chip that automaticallydeactivates the electronic immobiliser.

The electronic immobiliser is automaticallyactivated when the key is outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

198

Start and driving

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine CUPRA key with its correct code.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine CUPRA keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 140 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the key next to the right trim of thesteering column ››› Fig. 140 , as close as pos-sible to the Kessy logo.

● The ignition connects and the enginestarts automatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in-strument panel display

Press the brake● This message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or P● This message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever ofthe automatic gearbox is not in position P orN. The engine can only be started and stop-ped in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle canmove; doors can only close in posi-tion P.● For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox isnot in position P after you switch off the igni-tion. Move the selector lever to the P posi-tion, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Gear change: selector lever in thedrive position!● This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P whenthe driver door is opened. Additionally, abuzzing sound is emitted. Put the selectorlever in position P, otherwise the vehiclecould roll away.

Ignition is switched on● This driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

“My Beat” function*3 Valid for: vehicles with the engine start buttonon the centre console.

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle igni-tion system.

When entering the vehicle, the start button››› Fig. 139 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine startbutton flashes. With the ignition is switchedoff, the start button goes off after a few sec-onds.

With the engine running, the start buttonlight stays on, indicating that the engine isrunning. The time elapsed between the »

199

Driving

moment the user starts the engine with thestart button button and the lighting changesfrom flashing to fixed will depend on specificengine size characteristics. When the startbutton is used to stop the engine, the buttonstarts flashing again.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the start button buttonstays on, as the Start-Stop system remainsactive even though the engine is off.● When the engine cannot be started againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 200 ,and needs to be started manually, the startbutton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has been dis-connected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated. Startthe engine manually● This indication for the driver shows thatthe Start-Stop system cannot start the en-gine again.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available● There is a fault in the Start-Stop system.Take the vehicle to a workshop to have thefault repaired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fueland reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automat-ically switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping. The ignition remains switched on.The engine automatically switches back onwhen required.

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

More information on the Start-Stop systemcan be found in the Infotainment system:press the function button > View > Ve-hicle status.

Stopping and starting the engine● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your footon the brake pedal or activate the AutoHold* system so that the vehicle remainsbraked. The engine will switch off. The warn-ing lamp will appear in the display. The en-gine can be stopped before stopping com-pletely (approximately 7 or 2 km/h depend-ing on the vehicle's gearbox).● When you take your foot off the brakepedal the engine will start up again. Thewarning lamp will switch off. With the AutoHold* system, the engine will not start if youremove your foot from the brake pedal. Thecar starts when you press the acceleratorpedal.


200

Start and driving

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine has reached operating tem-perature.● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The engine does not turn off for variousreasonsBefore stopping the vehicle, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the re-quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.● The temperature selected on the climatecontrol has not been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 144.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or isbeing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.

● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

is shown on the instrument panel display,as well as on the driver information system*,.

The engine starts by itselfWhen stopped, the normal system modemay be interrupted in the following situa-tions. The engine restarts by itself without in-volvement from the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thetemperature selected on the climate control.● Defrost function button activated››› page 144.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

Additional information related to the au-tomatic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever isin the positions P, D, N and S in addition towhen in Tiptronic mode. With the selectorlever in P, the engine will also remain switch-ed off when you take your foot off the brakepedal. In order to start the engine up againthe accelerator must be pressed, or anothergear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the enginefrom accidentally starting when passingthrough R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the ve-hicle is stationary. The operation of thebrake and steering will not be fully guaran-teed. More force will be needed to turn thesteering wheel or to brake. You could sufferan accident and even serious injuries.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when working inthe engine compartment ››› page 202 .

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 216 .

Note● You can control whether the engineshould switch off or not by reducing or »

201

Driving

increasing the brake force applied. Whilethe vehicle remains stopped, the enginewill not stop if the brake pedal is slightlypressed, in traffic jams with frequent stop-ping and starting for example. As soon asstrong pressure is applied to the brake ped-al, the engine will stop.● When stopped, the brake pedal must bekept pressed to ensure that the vehicledoes not move.● If the lever is placed in position D, N or Safter engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6mph) in a forwards direction must bereached for the system to be in a conditionto stop the engine.

Manually connecting and disconnect-ing the Start-Stop system

Fig. 141 Centre console: Start-stop system but-ton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button ››› Fig. 141 .

The button symbol remains lit up yellowwhen the system is switched off.

NoteThe system switches on every time the en-gine is turned off voluntarily.

DSG automatic transmission

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-cally controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of thevehicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually ››› page 204, Chang-ing gear in Tiptronic mode.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 142 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown whenthe corresponding sign lights up. With theselector lever in the manual gearbox posi-tions M, D and S, the engaged gear is alsoshown on the display.

202

Start and driving

– Parking lockWhen the lever is put in this position, thedrive wheels are locked. The lever must onlybe put in P when the vehicle is stationary››› .

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , thelocking button must be pressed and held andthe brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

– Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› .

To move the lever to position R, the lock but-ton must be pressed and held while pressingthe brake pedal at the same time. The re-verse lights come on when the lever is in theR position with the ignition on.

– NeutralWith the lever in this position, the gear is inneutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever fromN to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or atspeeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› .

– Permanent forward drive positionThe lever in the D/S position enables thegears to be operated in normal mode (D) orsport mode (S). To select Sport mode S,move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever

again will select normal mode D. The selec-ted driving mode is shown on the instrumentpanel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects thebest gear ratio. This depends on the engineload, the road speed and the dynamic gearcontrol programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for asporty driving style. This setting makes use ofthe engine's maximum power output. Whenaccelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-tain roads) it can be advantageous to switchtiptronic mode ››› page 204 , to adapt thegears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lockIn P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear rangefrom being engaged, and prevents the vehi-cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and holdthe brake pedal with the ignition on. At thesame time, press the lever lock in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 142 .

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever isin positions P or N the following indicationwill be shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quicklythrough position N (e.g. when shifting from Rto D). This makes it possible, for instance, to“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” ifit is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-gages automatically if the brake pedal is notpressed and the lever is in position N formore than about one second at a speed ofless than 5 km/h (3 mph).

WARNING● Take care not to press the acceleratorpedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-hicle could start moving immediately (insome cases even if the parking brake is en-gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.● Never move the lever to R or P when driv-ing. Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in an accident or failure.● With lever in any position (except P), thefoot brake must be pushed down wheneverthe engine is running. This is because anautomatic gearbox still transmits powereven at idling speed.● While you are selecting a gear and the ve-hicle is stopped with the engine running, donot accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. Switch on the electronic parkingbrake and select the parking lock (P). »

203

Driving

Note● If the lever is moved accidentally to Nwhen driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling beforeselecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply to the lever beinterrupted in position P, it will not be pos-sible to move the lever. If this should hap-pen the manual release can be used››› page 208.

Note● If the selector lever lock does not engage,there is a fault. The transmission is inter-rupted to prevent the vehicle from acci-dentally moving. To lock the selector leveragain, press the brake pedal, place the se-lector lever in the P or N position and thenengage a gear.● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehicledoes not move forwards or back. Proceedto the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engaged.Press the brake pedal and engage thegear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode

Fig. 143 Centre console: tiptronic transmission

Fig. 144 Steering wheel: automatic transmissionlevers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro-gramme, the vehicle remains in the currentlyselected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automaticallydue to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector leverIt is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

● Starting from the D/S position, move thelever to the right. The instrument panel willshow whether the lever is in manual or Tip-tronic mode (e.g. M4).● Push the lever forwards + or backwards –to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 143 .● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever tothe left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddlesThe gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)positions.

● Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 144 .● Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-proximately 1 second or move the lever tothe left.

204

Start and driving

If the paddles are not operated for sometime and the lever is not in the Tiptronic se-lection position, it will automatically exit fromTiptronic mode.

CAUTION● When accelerating, if a higher gear is notselected, it will automatically change short-ly before reaching the maximum permittedRPM.● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-tem will not change until it detects that theengine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures(below -10 °C), the engine can only start withthe selector lever in position P..

Driving down hillsUnder certain circumstances it may be ad-vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-lect the gear manually according to drivingconditions ››› .

Stop/ParkOn level ground, just use the lever to engageposition P. On slopes you should first applythe parking brake and then set the lever to P.This makes it easier to remove the lever fromposition P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever isnot in position P, the vehicle could move.The following warning is displayed on the in-strument panel: Gear change: selec-tor lever in the drive position!.Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhillAlways apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,apply the electronic parking brake ››› .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears isengaged to prevent the car from rollingdownhill ››› .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-tion● Once you have engaged a gear, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and gently press theaccelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Holdfunction● Pull on the electronic parking brake but-ton.

● Once you have engaged a gear, gentlypress the accelerator and pull on the elec-tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programmeIf all the positions of the lever are shown overa light background on the instrument paneldisplay, there is a system fault and the auto-matic gearbox will operate in with the back-up programme. It is still possible to drive thevehicle, however, at low speeds and within aselected range of gears. Driving in reversegear may not be possible.

Kick-downThe kick-down system provides maximumacceleration when the gear selector lever isin the positions D, S or in the Tiptronicmode.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayeduntil the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 203. »

205

Driving

● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for longperiods, as the brakes can overheat. Thisreduces the braking power, increases thebraking distance or even causes a brakesystem fault.● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the ve-hicle’s brakes applied with the brake pedalor parking brake.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.● If you allow the vehicle to roll with thelever in position N and the engine off, theautomatic gearbox will be damaged by lackof lubrication.

● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, the gears could overheat and bedamaged! If the warning lamp lights up,stop the vehicle as soon as you can and waitfor the gearbox to cool ››› page 208 .● If the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Launch-control program

The Launch-control programme enablesmaximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reachedoperating temperature and the steeringwheel must not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is dif-ferent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon-nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) throughthe infotainment system menu ››› page 84 .The warning lamp will stay switched on orwill flash slowly depending on whether or notthe vehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) appearson the instrument panel to indicate the de-activation status.

● With the engine running, switch off trac-tion control (ASR) ››› page 250 1).● Press the brake pedal with your left footand hold it down for at least one second.● Turn the selector lever to the S or Tiptronicposition, or else select the sport drivingmode from the Drive Profile* ››› page 211 .● With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down posi-tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Thevehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the Launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit,

1) Vehicles without a driver information system:the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with adriver information system: the warning lamp re-mains on.

206

Start and driving

and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start tospin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk ofaccident!● After moving off, the ESC “sport” modeshould be deactivated by briefly pressingthe button.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when thelever is in the D/S position and the brake isapplied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speedat which the vehicle was travelling when thebrake was applied, within logical limits. It maybe necessary to correct the speed by press-ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as far as3rd gear. It is possible that on very steepslopes you may have to switch to tiptronicmode and thus manually change down to2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of enginebraking and take the load off the brake sys-tem.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 220, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot bemaintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certaindistances without using the accelerator,which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia modeStatus: lever in position D, Drive Profile en-gine mode setting in ECO, gradients of lessthan 12% and speeds between 20 and 130km/h (12 and 80 mph).

● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-ment panel , the engaged gear and cur-rent consumption will disappear and theword Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage andthe vehicle will roll freely, without the effectof the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls,the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertiamode, simply remove your foot from the ac-celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= pro-longed section with less energy) and inertiadisconnection (= shorter section withoutthe need for fuel) facilitates improved fuelconsumption and emission balance.

With Drive Profile ››› page 211 , the inertiamode can be activated in the Comfort or In-dividual profiles. If the engine is set to ECOin the Individual mode, it is activated whenthe operating conditions are met. »

207

Driving

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “D” or “E” will appearinstead of “D7” or “E7”).● The inertia mode will be automaticallydisconnected on gradients steeper than15%.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!● The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox tocool with the engine at idling speed and theselector lever in position P. When the warn-

ing lamp and the driver message switch off,have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay. If they do not turnoff, do not continue driving. Seek specialistassistance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the positionP.● There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and do not continuedriving. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.● Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restrictions.Reverse gear disabled● Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D until switch-ing off the engine● Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly● Continue driving at moderate speeds.When the warning lamp switches off, youcan continue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.● If the warning was caused by the tempera-ture of the gearbox, this driver message willbe displayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 145 Gear selector lever: manual release fromthe parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting(e.g. discharged battery), the lever will re-main locked in position P. To move it to posi-tion N to move the vehicle, there is an emer-gency release device under the centre

208

Start and driving

console, on the right side. Releasing the se-lector lever requires a certain degree ofpractical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-er● Apply the electronic parking brake ››› .● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards over the leverhandle.

Releasing the selector lever● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, pressthe yellow tab sideways and keep it presseddown ››› Fig. 145 .● Press the lock button on the selector lev-er and move it to position N.● After completing the emergency release,reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-box console.

WARNINGDo not move the lever from position P if theparking brake is not firmly engaged. If youstill think the car could move, press thebrake pedal. Danger! The vehicle couldmove in an unforeseen way and cause anaccident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommendation

Selecting the optimal gear

Depending on the equipment on the instru-ment panel screen, a recommendation isshown with the gear that should be engagedto optimise consumption.

The lever must be in Tiptronic mode››› page 204.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is engaged. The current gear will bedisplayed.

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is recom-mended.

Changing to a lower gear is recom-mended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterWhen the exhaust system detects that theparticulate filter is close to saturation, thissystem’s self-cleaning function recommendsthe optimal gear for that function››› page 287.

WARNINGThe gear change recommendation is anauxiliary function and in no case should bea substitute for careful driving.● Responsibility for selecting the correctgear, depending on the circumstances,rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe indication of the recommended gearturns off when the lever is taken out of theTiptronic position.

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

Control lamps

It lights up white

Hill Descent Control is active.

It lights up grey

Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switch-ed on, but is not adjusting. »

209

Driving

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Description and operation

Hill Descent Control limits the speed onsteep descents by automatically braking allfour wheels, both when moving forward andin reverse. As the anti-lock brake system re-mains active, it prevents the wheels fromlocking.

After starting the descent of a slope below30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a mini-mum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, thedriver may increase or decrease the speedwithin the limit by pressing the accelerator orthe brake. At this point the function is inter-rupted and, if necessary, it is then reactiva-ted.

Even so, it is imperative that the surfaceguarantees sufficient adhesion. For this rea-son, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil itsfunction when, for example, descending aslope with a frozen or slippery surface.

Hill Descent Control is available when thedash panel display shows the message .

Hill Descent Control automatically inter-venes if the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle engine is running.● The Offroad driving profile has been se-lected ››› page 211 . Driving at a speed below30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shownon the instrument panel).● The slope of the descent is at least 10%when driving forward and 9% when driving inreverse.● The brake and the accelerator are notpressed.

Hill Descent Control is deactivated on press-ing the brake and the accelerator or if theslope is below 5%. The function can beswitched off manually in the infotainmentsystem using the > HDC function button.

WARNINGAlways be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac-cident could occur and cause injury.● Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliarysystem that in some situations may not suf-ficiently brake the vehicle when goingdown a slope.● The speed of the vehicle may increasedespite the intervention of Hill DescentControl.

Steering

Information relating to different vehi-cle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engineis stopped, it is possible to continue to rotatethe steering wheel as long as the key remainsin the ignition, but more force must be ap-plied.

Progressive steeringDepending on the vehicle’s features, it mayor may not incorporate a progressive steer-ing system.

In city traffic you do not need to turn somuch on parking, manoeuvring or in verytight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressivesteering transmits, for example, in bends, asportier, more direct and noticeably moredynamic driving sensation.

Steering assistThis help assists the driver in critical situa-tions. It recommends turning the steeringwheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre

210

Start and driving

(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoidskidding ››› .

WARNINGSteering assist helps the driver in criticalsituations. The driver is the person who hasto control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering.Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and in a safe manner.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have thesteering checked.If the warning light does not come on again after re-starting the engine and driving a short distance, it isnot necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and recon-nected.Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph).

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. Consider themessages shown on the instrument panel display.Do not continue driving if the steering column re-mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGNever ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.● If the warning lamps and the correspond-ing messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic, causing serious damage oraccidents and injuries.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

Driving modes (Drive Profile)*

Introduction

The Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between six profiles or modes, Com-

fort, Sport, Cupra, Individual, Offroad andSnow, that modify the behaviour of variousvehicle functions, providing different drivingexperiences.

The Individual profile can be configured ac-cording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in thevehicle, the Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the en-gine responds more quickly or smoothly tothe accelerator being pressed.

The gear change points are modified to posi-tion them in lower or higher engine speedranges.

In addition, the function for taking advantageof inertia is activated in the Individual pro-file, when the engine is set to ECO, allowingconsumption to be reduced further.

Adaptive chassis control (DCC)*DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-ers to the condition of the road and currentdriving conditions, according to the pre-setprogramme. »

211

Driving

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-ing message is displayed on the instrumentscreen Fault: shock absorber regula-tion

SteeringThe power steering varies its driving modesand adapts to the profile selected, thus of-fering the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioningClimatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe-cially restricting fuel consumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*Depending on the driving profile, the per-formance of the ACC varies, to allow moresporty acceleration and braking or a morerespectful fuel consumption.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, theelectronic stability Control (ESC) ››› page 249adjusts to adapt to the terrain.

In addition, hill descent control (HDC) is acti-vated in the Offroad profile ››› page 210 .

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 146 Centre console: Driving Experience but-ton.

Fig. 147 Multifunction steering wheel*: button tochange the driving profile.

You can choose from the Comfort, Sport,Cupra, Individual, Offroad and Snow pro-files.

The desired mode can be selected as fol-lows:

● Turn the Driving Experience button untilthe required profile lights up on the infotain-ment system display as well as on the DrivingExperience button ››› Fig. 146 .● OR: select the required profile on thetouch-screen of the infotainment system, inthe menu that opens up on turning theDriving Experience button.● OR: briefly press the CUPRA button* onthe left hand side of the steering wheel››› Fig. 147 to change the driving profile.Press and hold the CUPRA button* to accessthe Cupra profile directly. Press and holdagain to return to the previous profile.

The features of each profile can be seen bypressing the Profile information func-tion button.

In the Individual profile it is possible to con-figure the characteristics of the vehicle usingthe Profile setup function button.

An icon on the infotainment system displayinforms about the active profile. The selectoridentifies the profile chosen by means of ared LED light.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Convenience

It permits more relaxed and com-fortable driving, for example forlong motorway journeys. Its maincharacteristic is the soft suspen-sion setting (DCC).

212

Start and driving

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Sport

It represents the vehicle's defaultbehaviour, suitable for dynamicdriving.

Cupra

It gives the vehicle a decidedlysportier nature, and makes formaximum performance.

Individual

It allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

Offroad

It adjusts the vehicle's parametersin order to maintain optimal off-road driving.

Snow

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviourfor driving on slippery road surfa-ces, optimising grip and manoeu-vrability.

WARNINGWhen operating the Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the engine is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition was turned off. When re-started, the engine and the gearbox willstart in their Normal mode. To return the

engine and gear to your desired mode, re-select the corresponding driving profile.● When the vehicle is restarted after usingthe Offroad or Snow settings, the system isalways activated in the Sport profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and trafficconditions.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engineA new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres(1000 miles). During its first few hours ofrunning, the internal friction in the engine isgreater than later on when all the movingparts have bedded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first1500 km (1000 miles) influences the futureengine performance. Throughout the life ofthe vehicle, it should be driven at a moderatespeed (especially when the engine is cold)this will reduce engine wear and increase itsuseful life. Never drive at extremely low en-gine speeds. Always engage a lower gear

when the engine works “irregularly”. For thefirst 1000 km or 600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.● Do not force the engine above two thirdsof its maximum speed.● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600to 1000 miles), gradually increase poweruntil reaching the maximum speed and highengine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 303.● Information about brakes ››› page 244 .

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive)

On four-wheel drive models, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels

General notesOn four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. The »

213

Driving

distribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 249 .

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power.This combination gives the vehicle excep-tional handling and performance capabili-ties, both on normal roads and in more diffi-cult conditions, such as snow and ice. Evenso (or perhaps especially for this reason), it isimportant to observe certain safety points››› .

Winter tyresThanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chainsOn roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 307.

Changing tyresOn vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 303 .

Off-roader?Your CUPRA vehicle is not an off-roader: itdoes not have enough ground clearance tobe used as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING● Even with four-wheel drive, you shouldalways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driv-ing. Risk of accident!● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheeldrive. So do not be tempted to drive toofast on firm or slippery roads just becausethe vehicle still has good acceleration inthese conditions. Risk of accident!● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warnthe driver, as occurs with a front-wheeldrive car. For this reason you should alwayschoose a driving speed suitable for the roadconditions. Risk of accident!

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres alldepend largely on driving style. Consump-tion can be reduced between 10-15% withan efficient driving type. The following sec-tion gives you some tips on lessening the im-pact on the environment and reducing youroperating costs at the same time.

Foresight when drivingIf you think ahead when driving, you willneed to brake less and thus accelerate less.Take advantage of the inertia of the vehiclewhenever possible, with a gear engaged.This takes advantage of the engine brakingeffect, reducing wear on the brakes andtyres. Emissions and fuel consumption willdrop to zero.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear.

● Accelerate gradually and without reachingthe “kick-down” position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-sion of harmful gases and noise pollution

214

Start and driving

multiply as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idlingis automatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine hasreached operating temperature, and de-pending on the cylinder capacity, keeping itswitched off for a minimum of about 5 sec-onds already saves more than the amount offuel necessary for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at highspeed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improvedfuel efficiency as well as maximum reliabilityand an enhanced resale value. A badly serv-iced engine can consume up to 10% morefuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperaturein order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will re-turn to a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 304 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also in-creases tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisablemake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of

100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save12% of fuel.

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating*.

Note● If you have the Start-Stop system, it isrecommended that it should not be discon-nected.● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate slip. This causes wear and can damagethe clutch plate.● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use thebrake. The fuel consumption will be lowerand you will prevent the clutch plate frombeing damaged.● Use the engine brake on downhills bychanging to the gear that is best suited forthe gradient. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

215

Driving

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 244 .

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission or electrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 200.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 315 .

Trips abroad

● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensuredthat lead-free petrol is available throughoutthe journey ››› page 285, Fuel types . Seekinformation about service station networksselling unleaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourvehicle is not sold and some spare parts maynot be available or the technical servicesmay only be able to make limited repairs.

CUPRA distributors and importers will pro-vide information about the technical prepa-ration that your vehicle requires and alsoabout necessary maintenance and repairpossibilities.

CAUTIONCUPRA does not accept liability for anydamage to the vehicle due to the use of alower quality fuel, an inadequate service orthe non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Driver assistance systems

General notes

Safety advice

WARNING● Responsibility for driving rests with thedriver at all times. The driver assistancesystems are not a replacement for driverattention. Focus all your attention on driv-ing and be prepared to intervene at alltimes.● Use the driver assistance systems onlywhen conditions allow. The driving stylemust always be suitable for the weather,visibility, road and traffic conditions.● In order for driver assistance systems toreact correctly, sensors and cameras mustoperate without limitations. Please readthe notes on sensors and cameras in thischapter.

Note● Keep in mind the specific rules of eachcountry, especially when it comes to driv-ing, formation of an emergency corridor,braking distance, speed, parking position,wheel position, etc. The driver is solely re-sponsible for always complying with thespecific regulations of each country.

216


● The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhe-sives, additional headlights or similar items,as this could have a negative impact on theoperation of the assistants. If the vehicle isnot properly repaired or structural modifi-cations are made to it, the operation of theassistants may be affected.● The repair and adjustment of sensors andcameras requires special knowledge andtools. It is recommended to visit a CUPRAdealership for this purpose.

System limits

WARNING● Driver assistance systems can not over-come the laws of physics. Depending onthe circumstances, a collision may not beavoidable.● Warnings, notices and indicator lampsmay not be displayed on time, or may bedisplayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap-proaches too quickly.● Corrective interventions by driver assis-tance systems (e.g. interventions in thesteering or brakes) may be insufficient ormay never occur, depending on the cir-cumstances. As a driver, you must be pre-pared to act at all times.

Note● Due to the system's detection limits in thesurroundings, the systems may not givewarnings or intervene on time, or theymight do so even if it is not desired. In addi-tion, the auxiliary systems may incorrectlyinterpret a manoeuvre and, as a result,warn the driver in an unexpected manner.● When the towing mode is selected, someassist systems may react with limitations, inan unusual way or may not be available.Keep in mind the instructions relating tothe towing mode.

Driver assistance sensors andcameras

Front radar

Fig. 148 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

Fig. 149 Detection area.

A radar sensor may be fitted to the frontbumper of the vehicle ››› Fig. 148 . The frontradar detects any objects in its detectionzone ››› Fig. 149 and provides support forthe following functions:

● Front Assist ››› page 224 .● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)››› page 228.

The radar can have a range of up to 120m(400ft) depending on road and weatherconditions.

WARNINGThe visibility of the radar sensor can be im-paired by dirt or environmental influencessuch as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insectsetc. In this case the Front Assist and ACCfunctions may stop working. The instru-ment panel displays the following message:No sensor vision! And the Front Assist »

217

Driving

unavailable or ACC unavailable warninglights come on.● Clean the sensor area on the bumper asindicated in ››› page 317, Cleaning the exte-rior . When the radar sensor starts correctlydetecting again, the message disappearsfrom the screen and the functions becomeavailable again.

CAUTION● If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus-ted, the Front Assist system may give un-necessary warnings and apply the brakesinappropriately.● The operation of the radar can be affec-ted by strong reflections of the emitted sig-nal. This may occur, for example, in an en-closed car park or due to the presence ofmetallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheetsused in road works).● The sensor may not be adjusted correctlyif it receives an impact. This may compro-mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it.If you have the feeling that the radar sensoris damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switchoff the Front Assist and ACC functions toavoid any damage. If this occurs have it ad-justed.

Front camera

Fig. 150 On the windscreen: field of vision of theLane Assist system.

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay be fitted with a front camera on thefront windscreen ››› Fig. 150 . This cameradetects lane boundaries (lines) to providesupport for the following functions:

● Lane Assist ››› page 233 .● Travel Assist ››› page 235 .● Emergency assist ››› page 238 .

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tems, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.

● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.

Rear radar

Fig. 151 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensorzones.

Fig. 152 Sensor detection zones218


The radar sensors are located on the left andright of the bumper and are not visible fromthe outside ››› Fig. 151 . The sensors monitorboth the blind spot and traffic behind the ve-hicle ››› Fig. 152 .

They support the following functions:

● Lane departure warning (Side Assist)››› page 240.● Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) ››› page 242 .

Automatic deactivation of supportedfunctionsThe rear radar sensors deactivate automati-cally when, among other reasons, one of thesensors is detected to be permanently cov-ered. This may be the case if, for example,there is a layer of snow or ice over one of thesensors.

The relevant text message will appear in thedash panel display.

CAUTION● The radar sensors on the rear bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event of acollision, for example, when entering or ex-iting a parking space. This may result in thesystem disconnecting itself, or at least pos-sibly having its functionality diminished.● In order to ensure that the radar sensorswork properly, keep the rear bumper freeof snow and ice and do not cover it.

● The rear bumper should only be paintedwith paint authorised by CUPRA. The lanedeparture warning's functions may be limi-ted or work incorrectly if other paints areused.● The visibility of radar sensors may be af-fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze ordirt, among others. Clean the area in frontof the sensors.● Never use the lane departure warning,the rear cross traffic alert or the dooropening warning if the radar sensors aredirty.

Ultrasound sensors

The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sen-sors to perform the following functions:

● Park Assist ››› page 252 .● Parking aid Plus ››› page 260 .● Rear parking aid ››› page 263 .

CAUTION● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space for

the number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.

Area View system

Fig. 153 In the rear lid handle: Area View system »219

Driving

Depending on your vehicle’s equipment, itcan be fitted with 1 or 4 cameras that providesupport to the following functions:

● Area View ››› page 267● Rear View Camera ››› page 271 .

WARNINGThe use of a number plate may interfere inthe views shown on the screen, since thecameras' field of vision may be reduced.

CAUTION● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snowor ice, and do not cover them with adhe-sives or other objects.● Never use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lenses.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lenses. Doingso could damage the lenses.

Cruise control system (CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignitionis switched on and should turn off after ap-proximately 2 seconds. This is the time takenfor the function check.


Introduction

Fig. 154 Instrument panel display: GRA status indi-cations.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by ceas-ing to accelerate, not by actively braking thevehicle ››› .

Status displayGRA status ››› Fig. 154

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop.

A

B

220


CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSIf the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-cle speed downhill, brake and change downa gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarilydisabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic offThe GRA disconnects automatically or istemporarily interrupted:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems in-tervene, ASR, ESC, etc.● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

C

D

WARNINGUse of GRA could cause accidents and se-vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at aconstant speed maintaining the safety dis-tance.● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-cient, on steep roads, with several bends orin slippery circumstances or on floodedroads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Adapt your speed and the distance to thevehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-er, the condition of the road and the trafficsituation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for other conditions.● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRAcannot maintain a constant speed. Thespeed can increase. In this case, brake andchange down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 155 On the turn signal lever: controls for op-erating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the control ››› Fig. 155 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the control ››› Fig. 155 1 to orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched offtemporarily. The speed is stored. »

221

Driving

Reinstating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed canbe adjusted with button ››› Fig. 155 2 :

● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1mph) briefly press button ››› Fig. 155 2 inthe area .● To increase the speed without interrup-tion, keep button ››› Fig. 155 2 presseddown in the area .● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 155 2 in the area .● To reduce the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 155 2 pressed down inthe area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating. The ve-hicle does not brake actively.

Switching off● Move control ››› Fig. 155 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

Speed limiter

Control lamp

It lights up green

The speed limiter is switched on and active.

Flashes green

The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee-ded.

It lights up

The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiteris active.



Introduction

Fig. 156 On the instrument panel display: indica-tions of the speed limited status.

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding aprogrammed speed, from 30 km/h (19 mph)approx. and faster. ››› Depending on the equipment, the speedlimiter can be operated using the lever of theturn signals ››› page 224 or from the multi-function steering wheel.

Display messages on the speed limiterStatus ››› Fig. 156 :

The speed limiter is active. The lastspeed set is displayed in large figures.The speed limiter is not active. The lastspeed set is displayed in small or dark-ened figures.The speed limiter is switched off. The to-tal mileage is displayed.

A

B

C

222


Switching between the speed limiter andGRA or ACC (while the speed limiter isconnected)To change between the driving assistancesystems, press button ››› Fig. 157 2 , thenselect with the right thumbwheel on themultifunction steering wheel in the instru-ment panel menu and press the thumbwheelto confirm your selection.

It switches between the speed limiter andcruise control (GRA) or the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC).

Going down slopes with the speed limiterIf the programmed speed is exceeded whiledriving downhill, after a short time the con-trol warning lamp ››› page 222 flashes andan audible warning may sound. Brake andchange down a gear.

Temporarily deactivate by pressing the ac-celerator downIf the accelerator is pressed right down (kick-down) and the set speed is exceeded be-cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter istemporarily disabled.

To confirm it being switched off an acousticsignal sound once. While cruise control isoff, the control lamp flashes .

When the accelerator is no longer presseddown and the speed is reduced below the

set value, the limiter switches on again. Thecontrol lamp will light up and remain lit.

Automatic offThe speed limiter is automatically switchedoff:

● If the system detects a fault that couldnegatively affect the working order of thelimiter.● If the airbag is triggered.

WARNINGAfter use, switch off the speed limiter toprevent the speed being regulated withoutit being required.● The speed limiter does not relieve thedriver of their responsibility to drive at theappropriate speed. Do not drive at highspeed if not necessary.● Using the speed limiter in adverse weath-er conditions is dangerous and can causeserious accidents. Use the speed limiteronly when the condition of the road surfaceand the weather and traffic conditions al-low it.● When driving on a steep gradient, thespeed limiter cannot limit the vehicle’sspeed. This can increase. In this case, brakeand change down a gear.

CAUTIONFor automatic switching off due to systemfailures, for security reasons, the limiter isonly completely switched off when thedriver stops pressing the accelerator orconsciously switches it off.

Note● Different versions of the instrument pan-el are available and therefore the versionsand instructions on the display may vary.● If the cruise control (GRA), the adaptivecruise control (ACC) or the speed limiterare connected when the ignition is switch-ed off, the assistants will switch it when theignition is switched on, but only the speedlimiter will maintain the last programmedspeed.

223

Driving

Operating the speed limiter with theturn signal lever

Fig. 157 On the turn signal lever: buttons to oper-ate the speed limiter.

Connecting● Move control ››› Fig. 157 1 to position and press button 2 .

The last programmed speed is stored. It doesnot take effect yet.

Activating the speed limiter● While driving, press button ››› Fig. 157 3 inthe area .

The current speed is stored as the maximumspeed.

Setting the programmed speedYou can set the speed using button››› Fig. 157 3 :

● Briefly press area to increase speed insmall increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold the area to continu-ously increase speed in increments of 10km/h (5 mph).● Briefly press area to decrease speedin small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph).● Press and hold area to continuouslydecrease speed in increments of 10 km/h (5mph).

The speed is limited to the set value.

Switching off the speed limiter● Move control ››› Fig. 157 1 to position .

The system switches off.

Switching off temporarilyIf you want to temporarily deactivate thespeed limiter, e.g. for overtaking, move thecontrol ››› Fig. 157 1 to position orpress button 2 .

After overtaking, the speed limiter can beactivated with the previously programmedspeed by pressing button ››› Fig. 157 3 inthe area .

Emergency brake assistancesystem (Front Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 158 On the instrument panel display: advancewarning indications.

The objective of the system is to preventhead-on collisions against objects that maybe in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti-cal the situation is, the system operates in astaggered manner. First it warns the driver,and if the driver’s reaction does not occur oris insufficient, it activates independentemergency braking.

Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending

224


on a range of conditions, some of the func-tions described below are omitted to opti-mize the behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance functionthat can never replace the driver’s atten-tion.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects that you are driving tooclose to the vehicle in front, it will warn thedriver with this indication on the instrumentpanel display .

The timing of the warning varies according toother factors: driver behaviour and speed.

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it alerts the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 158.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervenein the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn

the driver of the imminent danger of a colli-sion.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking in accordance with howcritical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance systemThe system may detect that the driver is notbraking hard enough to avoid the collision. Inthis case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al-though it can significantly minimise the con-sequences by reducing the speed and theforce of the impact.


WARNINGFront Assist cannot change the laws ofphysics or replace the driver in terms ofkeeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.

WARNINGFollowing a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision as appli-cable.● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly in-tervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. Havethe system checked by a specialised work-shop. CUPRA recommends visiting a speci-alised CUPRA dealer or any SEAT dealer-ship.● Always adapt your speed and distanceaway from the vehicle in front of you at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.● In complex driving situations, Front Assistmay issue warnings and intervene in brak-ing unnecessarily.● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired by dirt or because the radar sensorhas lost its settings, the system may issueunnecessary warnings and intervene inop-portunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or approach-ing head-on down the same lane.● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking head-on in the same lane.● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle. »

225

Driving

Note● When Front Assist is connected, the indi-cations of other functions on the screenmay be hidden.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenesseveral times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Operation of the emergency brake as-sistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 159 On the instrument panel display: FrontAssist deactivated indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning and the distancewarning functions.

CUPRA recommends leaving the Front Assistactivated. Exceptions ››› page 227, Deacti-vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front As-sist can be deactivated or activated as fol-lows:● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 81 .● OR: using the Infotainment system: pressthe function button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 88 .

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the in-dication ››› Fig. 159 will be displayed onthe instrument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The advance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the infotainment system usingthe function button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 88 .

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

CUPRA recommends keeping advance warn-ing active.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainmentsystem the advance warning function maybe adapted in the following modes:

● Advance● Medium

226


● Delayed● Deactivated

CUPRA recommends driving with the func-tion in “Medium” mode.

Switching distance warning on and offThe safety distance warning can be activatedor deactivated in the infotainment systemusing the function button > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 88 .

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

CUPRA recommends keeping the distancewarning active.

Deactivating Front Assist temporarilyin the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● When the radar sensor is damaged.● If the radar sensor receives a violent im-pact.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.

● If the radar sensor is temporarily coveredby an accessory.● When the vehicle is going to be loaded on-to transportation.

System limitations

Fig. 160 On the instrument panel display: initialsystem self-calibration indication.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherentto the system. Thus, in certain circumstan-ces, some of the reactions may be inappro-priate from the driver's standpoint. So payattention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’s

initial auto-calibration. During this period, astatus icon ››› Fig. 160 is displayed.● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode ››› page 250 .● If the ESC is controlling.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails orsheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.● Misaligned vehicles.● Vehicles crossing the other's path.● Vehicles approaching in the opposite di-rection.● Loads and accessories of other vehiclesthat protrude over the sides, backwards orover the top.

227

Driving

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control*

Introduction

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains aconstant speed set by the driver.

When approaching another vehicle in front,the ACC detects it and adapts the speed au-tomatically, maintaining a distance set by thedriver.

Does my vehicle have ACC?Your vehicle has ACC if it has a configurationmenu in the infotainment system ››› page 88and if it has the ACC function buttons on themultifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 161 .

Speed rangeACC regulates speeds between 30 km/h (20mph) and 210 km/h (130 mph).

The ACC can brake vehicle until it stopscompletely before a vehicle that stops.

Driver intervention promptACC is subject to certain limitations in-herent to the system. This means thatthe driver will have to control the speedand distance from other vehicles in cer-tain situations. In this case, the instru-ment cluster display will tell you to in-

tervene by applying the brake, and anaudio warning will be played.

Radar sensorsThe ACC uses the front radar technology.Read its maintenance instructions and infor-mation about its limitations ››› page 216 .

WARNINGThe ACC’s technology cannot overcomethe system's inherent limitations or changethe laws of physics. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Always be prepared to brake or acceler-ate.● If you press the accelerator pedal theACC will stop working. Therefore, it will notbrake or request any braking intervention.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, oron roads that are steep, with lots of curvesor slippery.● Never use ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads.● The system does not react to stationaryobstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). Re-act soon enough to avoid a hazardous sit-uation.

● The system does not react to people, ani-mals or vehicles that are crossing or ap-proaching in the opposite direction.● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-ted, the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off. Switch off the system whenstarting off.● Brake immediately if the ACC does notslow down enough.● Brake immediately when a driver inter-vention instruction is displayed on the in-strument cluster screen.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle.

NoteIf the ACC does not work as described inthis chapter, do not use it until it has beenchecked by a specialised workshop. CUPRArecommends visiting a specialised CUPRAdealer or any SEAT dealership.

228


ACC operation

Fig. 161 On the multifunction steering wheel:buttons to operate the ACC

Connecting● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

The ACC does not regulate anything yet(standby).

Start regulation● To start regulation, press the button ››› Fig. 161.

The ACC sets the current speed, or the clos-est speed within the valid range (30-210km/h), as the cruise speed.

The gear lever must be in the D, S or M posi-tion.

Depending on the driving situation, the fol-lowing indicator lamps come on:

It lights up green

ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.

It lights up green

ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.

When the ACC is in standby, the indicatorlamps light up grey.

Setting speedTo program the speed, press the or ››› Fig. 161 buttons to the desired speed. Thespeed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5mph).

When the ACC is active, the button canbe pressed to increase the desired speed by1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press to de-crease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Setting your distance levelThe distance can be set to one of five levels,from very short to very long:

● Press the button and then the button or ››› Fig. 161 .● Alternatively, press the button as manytimes as necessary to set the desired dis-tance.

Keep in mind each country’s regulations onminimum braking distances.

Suspend regulation (standby)● Briefly press the button on the multi-function steering wheel or press the brakepedal.

The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speedand distance are saved.

If the ESC ASR ››› page 250 is disconnected,the ACC is automatically suspended.

Reinstating the cruise control● Press the button. The ACC regulates tothe last speed and distance setting.● OR: Press the button to use the currentspeed.

Switching off● Press and hold the button . The setspeed is cleared.

Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACCWhile driving with the ACC switched on, thedriver can increase speed by pressing the ac-celerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspen-ded until you release the accelerator pedal››› .

Set the default distance settingIn the Infotainment system, you can pre-se-lect the distance level when connecting theACC from: »

229

Driving

● Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Verylong using the Infotainment system: >Driver assistance > ACC ››› page 88 .

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driv-ing profile selected can have an influence onthe ACC’s acceleration and braking behav-iour ››› page 211 .

In vehicles without Drive Profile, the behav-iour of the ACC can also be affected if any ofthe following drive profiles are selected inthe infotainment system in Driver assis-tance. ACC settings will be the same asthose in the Drive Profile.

WARNINGBefore driving off, check that the road isclear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-stacles on the road. This could cause an ac-cident and serious injuries. If necessary,apply the brake.

CAUTIONIf you increase speed using the acceleratorpedal, the ACC may not be able to safelyadjust the speed of the distance due to thelimitations of the system.

● Be prepared to react if required by thesituation.

Status display

Fig. 162 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac-tive.

Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up ifthe distance to the vehicle is adjusted.Selected distance level 2.

This information can be displayed on thecentral panel of the Assists view, or in theleft hand information profile ››› page 67 . Ifthese views are not selected, it will be auto-matically displayed in the lower central partof the instrument cluster in a simplified man-ner.

1

2

The set speed will be displayed next to thefunction status indicator described in››› page 229, Start regulation.

Special driving situations

Fig. 163 On the instrument panel display: ACC ac-tive, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

Be aware of the limitations and warnings de-scribed at the beginning of this chapter.››› in Introduction on page 228.

Avoid undertaking on the right1)

If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that istravelling at a speed slower than that set bythe driver, it will brake the vehicle within thecomfort limits of the system to avoid passingit on the right ››› Fig. 163 .

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on theleft hand side of the road.

230


You can cancel this regulation by changingthe set speed or by pressing the acceleratorpedal.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h(50 mph). It may not be available in certaincountries.

OvertakingWhen the turn signal is switched on for over-taking, the ACC reduces the distance fromthe vehicle in front to help with the overtak-ing manoeuvre. The set cruising speed willnot be exceeded.

The function works at speeds over 80 km/h(50 mph). It may not be available in certaincountries.

Stop&Go functionThe ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill(0 km/h) if the vehicle in front stops.

The ACC remains active and the messageACC ready to start is displayed on the in-strument cluster for a few seconds. You canextend or reactivate this warning by pressingthe button or, depending on your vehi-cle’s equipment, by grabbing the steeringwheel. During this time, the vehicle will moveoff again if the vehicle in front moves for-wards.

To move off when the message ACC readyto start is not longer displayed, once thevehicle in front has moved off:

● Press the accelerator pedal.● OR: press the button or on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

The ACC is deactivated while stopped in thefollowing cases:

● If the vehicle stops for several minutes.● If a door is opened.

WARNINGIf the message ACC ready to start is dis-played on the instrument cluster displayand the vehicle in front moves off, your ve-hicle will move off automatically. In thiscase, any obstacles in the road may not bedetected. This may cause serious accidentsand injuries.● Always check the road before moving off,and apply the vehicle brakes yourself ifnecessary.

ACC system limitations

Fig. 164 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclistahead, out of range of the radar sensor. »

231

Driving

Fig. 165 Vehicle changing lanes. One vehi-cle turning and another stationary.

The limits of the ACC system mean that it isnot appropriate in all situations ››› in In-troduction on page 228.

CUPRA does not recommend using thefunction in the following cases ››› :

● Heavy rain, snow or fog.● When going through tunnels.● In sections with roadworks.● On routes with curves, e.g. on mountainroads.● On off-road routes.● In covered car parks.

● On roads with embedded metal objectssuch as train or tram tracks.● On roads with loose gravel.

Pay special attention when using ACC in thefollowing situations:

On curvesThe ACC may not detect the vehicle in fronton a curve, or may regulate the distancefrom vehicles in other lanes ››› Fig. 164 .

Vehicles outside the sensor zoneIn the following situations the ACC may notreact, or may react slowly or inappropriately:

● Vehicles that are not aligned while drivingor that are outside the sensor's detectionarea, such as motorcycles ››› Fig. 164 ● Vehicles that move into your lane, a shortdistance from your vehicle ››› Fig. 165 .● Vehicles with loads or accessories thatprotrude from the sides, rear or roof.

Objects that are not detectedThe ACC function only detects and reacts tovehicles moving in the same direction.Therefore it does not detect:

● People● Animals

● Vehicles travelling in the opposite directionor crossing the road.● Other stationary obstacles

The ACC does not react to stationary vehi-cles. If, for example, a vehicle detected bythe ACC turns or moves over and there is astationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC willnot react to the second vehicle ››› Fig. 165.

WARNINGUsing the ACC in the above situations cancause serious accidents and injuries, andyou could break the law.

Problems and solutions

ACC not available

The indicator lamp lights up yellow:

● The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted incor-rectly. Take into account the warnings de-scribed at the beginning of this chapter››› page 217● There is a fault or defect. Turn off the vehi-cle's ignition and turn it on again after a fewminutes.● If the problem persists, consult a special-ised workshop.

232


The ACC does not work as expected● Make sure that the conditions are met forthe radar sensor to operate properly››› page 217.● If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au-tomatically. Wait for them to cool down andcheck the operation again.● Unusual noises during automatic ACCbraking are normal and do not indicate anyanomalies.

The following conditions may lead the ACCnot to react:● The accelerator or brake is depressed.● No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gearR.● The vehicle is reversing.● ESC is operating.● The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● A vehicle or trailer brake light is faulty.● The RPM is too high or too low.● The parking brake is applied.● Driving on an excessive slope.

Lane Assist*

Introduction

The Lane Assist System helps the driverstay in his/her lane within the physical lim-its of the system. This function is not suita-ble and is not designed to keep the vehicleautomatically in the lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the limits(lane lines) dividing the lanes in which thevehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets tooclose to the detected lane limits, the systemalerts the driver through a corrective motionof the steering wheel. The driver can cancelthe steering corrective action at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

System limitsUse the Lane Assist system only on large,well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow-ing conditions:

● The driving speed allowed is below approx.55 km/h (30 mph).● The system has not detected any lanelines.

● On tight bends.● Temporarily in very sporty driving situa-tions.

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by the verynature of the system. Careless or uncon-trolled use of the Lane Assist system maycause accidents and injury. The system isnot a replacement for driver awareness ormanoeuvres when driving.● Always adapt your speed and the distanceto the vehicles ahead in line with visibility,weather conditions, the condition of theroad and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time. Theresponsibility of staying in the lane is alwaysthe driver's.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, roadstructures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. Immediately counter any un-wanted intervention of the system.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary ifthe traffic situation permits.● In the following situations there may beundesired interventions of the system or it »

233

Driving

may be that the system does not interveneat all. In these situations, special attentionis required from the driver and, where ap-propriate, the temporary deactivation ofthe lane assist warning system:– In very sporty driving situations.– In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition.– When passing through areas undergo-

ing works.– Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds.● Always observe the vehicle surroundingscarefully and drive proactively.● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

Control lamp

or It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

or It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectificationof the steering.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 166 On the instrument panel display: indica-tions of the Lane Assist System.

Lane line detected. The system inter-venes assisting on the represented side.Lane line detected. The system does notintervene.

Switching the lane assist system on or offIn some countries, the Lane Assist System isalways activated when the ignition is switch-

1

2

ed on. The connection status is shown in theDriver assistance menu of the Infotainmentsystem or the driver assistance systemsmenu after pressing the corresponding but-ton. The Lane Assist system can be activatedand deactivated in these menus.

The Lane Assist system is ready to actively in-tervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35mph) and if it has detected the lane limits(system status: active). The control lamp emits a green light. When the system inter-venes by rectifying the direction, the controllamp emits a yellow light.

If the control lamp of the instrument paneldisplay is off, it means that the Lane Assistsystem is connected but not ready to inter-vene or it is disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the systemtemporarily goes into a passive state in orderto allow manual lane change.

An energetic rotation or rectification of thesteering wheel by the driver causes the sys-tem to temporarily switch to a passive state.

Driver intervention promptIf the steering is not corrected manually, thesystem prompts the driver through an indi-cation on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, thesystem switches to a passive state.

234


Regardless of the steering manoeuvres,through an indication on the instrumentpanel display and acoustic warnings, thedriver is also prompted to drive through thecentre of the lane if the steering correctionlasts more than reasonable.

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situations may result in a steer-ing wheel vibration:

● The lane ceases to be recognised during asudden intervention in the direction of thesystem.

Troubleshooting

Error message, the system disconnects● Clean the windscreen. ››› page 315● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.

System behaviour is different than expec-ted● Clean the field of vision of the camera reg-ularly and make sure it is free of dirt, snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of the cam-era.● Check that the windscreen is not damagedin the area of the camera's field of vision.

● Do not mount objects on the steeringwheel.

In the event of doubts or queries, go to aspecialised workshop.

Driving Assist (Travel Assist)

Introduction

The driving assist (Travel Assist) combinesadaptive cruise control (ACC) and adap-tive lane guidance. Within the limitationsof the system, the vehicle can maintain adistance from the vehicle in front that ispreselected by the driver and remain inthe preferred position within the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap-tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist.Therefore, carefully read the informationabout the ACC ››› page 228 and the LaneAssist ››› page 233 and take into account thelimitations of the systems and the indicationsgiven in the information.

Speed rangeTravel Assist adjusts at speeds between ap-prox. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph) and approx.210 km/h (approx. 130 mph); in the case ofthe adaptive lane guidance function, be-tween 0 km/h (0 mph) and approx. 250

km/h (approx. 155 mph). This range may varydepending on the market.

Driving with Travel AssistTravel Assist automatically controls the ac-celerator pedal, the brakes and the steering.In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limi-tations, decelerate the vehicle until it stopsbehind another that stops and automaticallystarts again.

You can override assisted adjustment at alltimes.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted withTravel AssistThe vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if themultifunction steering wheel has the button ››› Fig. 169 .

Driver intervention promptIf you remove your hands from the steeringwheel, after a few seconds the system asksyou to take over the steering with an indica-tion on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings.

WARNINGThe Travel Assist smart technology cannotovercome the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics and it only works within the limits ofthe system. If Travel assist is used negli-gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious »

235

Driving

accidents and injuries. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Bear in mind the system limitations andthe indications regarding the control of theAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneAssist.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use Travel Assist when visibility isbad, on steep roads, on windy roads or inslippery circumstances (such as snow, ice,rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads.● Do not use Travel Assist offroad or onroads where the surface is not firm. TravelAssist has been designed for use on pavedroads only.● Travel Assist does not react to people oranimal or vehicles crossing your path orwhich approach you head-on in the samelane.● Brake immediately if Travel Assist doesnot slow down enough.● Brake immediately when a braking mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen.● Brake when, after an indication to brake,the vehicle rolls without it being desired.● Keep your hands on the steering wheel atall times, to ensure you have control overthe steering at all times. The driver is always

responsible for keeping the vehicle in itsown lane.● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-ing. The system could interpret this as nodriving activity.● If driver intervention is requested on theinstrument panel display, immediately re-sume control of the vehicle.● Always be prepared to adjust the speedyourself.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Fig. 167 On the instrument panel display: indica-tion with active adjustment.

Fig. 168 On the instrument panel display: controllamps.

Displays on the screen

››› Fig. 167The adaptive lane guidance function isactive.Distance set.

In addition, depending on the equipment,control lamps indicate the status of the sys-tem on the instrument panel display:

››› Fig. 168Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance func-tion are active.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol active and adaptive lane guidancefunction passive.Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol passive and adaptive lane guidancefunction active.

1

2

A

B

C

236


Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con-trol and adaptive lane guidance func-tion are passive.Inactive Travel Assist.

Depending on the equipment, more detailsmay be displayed on the instrument cluster,such as dashed lines or other vehicles on theroad.

Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 169 Left side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons for operating Travel Assist.

Connecting● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

The control lamp will light up green.The following warning is also displayed onthe instrument panel screen: The Travel As-sist maintains the current speed and the pre-

D

E

set distance from the vehicle in front. At thesame time, if it detects road markings itkeeps the vehicle in the lane by moving thesteering wheel.

Interrupting the adjustment● Briefly press the button on the multi-function steering wheel or press the brakepedal.

The set distance remains saved.

Making other adjustmentsFor all else, Travel Assist is operated like theACC ››› page 229 .


Travel Assist is not available or does notwork as expected

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● There is a fault in the sensors. Check thecauses and solutions described in››› page 217.● The system limits are exceeded.● If the fault continues, consult a specialisedworkshop.

Take the wheel

The warning lamp comes on white or red,depending on the urgency of the interven-tion. A message is also displayed.

● You released the steering wheel for a fewseconds. Take hold of the steering wheel andtake control of the vehicle.● The system limits have been reached. Takehold of the steering wheel and take controlof the vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automaticallyVehicles without Emergency Assist: You havereleased the steering wheel for a long peri-od.

● Abnormal operation. Contact a specialisedworkshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpect-edlyVehicles without lane departure warning:You have turned on the turn signal.

237

Driving

Emergency Assist

How it works

Emergency Assist can detect whetherthere is inactivity by the driver and can au-tomatically keep the car within the laneand stop it altogether if necessary. Thisway the system can actively help avoid anaccident or reduce its consequences.

Emergency Assist uses the same sensors asAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As-sist. Therefore, carefully read the informa-tion about the ACC ››› page 228 and theLane Assist ››› page 233 and take into ac-count the limitations of the systems and theindications given in the information.

If the Emergency Assist detects that the driv-er does not perform any activity, it requeststhat the driver take control of the vehicle. Todo this, it emits optical and acoustic warn-ings and causes braking jolts. The seat belt istightened (depending on the equipment).The system slows down the vehicle andkeeps it in its lane.

You can cancel the adjustment at any timeby moving the steering wheel, over-acceler-ating or braking.

While the emergency assistant is in opera-tion, other road users are warned as follows:

● The hazard warning lights are switched onsoon after.

The following happens as soon as the vehiclestops:

● The electronic parking brake is activated.

Connecting and disconnectingEmergency Assist can be connected and dis-connected in the infotainment system, in theassist services menu ››› page 88 .

When connected, the Emergency Assist isonly activated if the following requirementsare met:

● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must beswitched on .● The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist areswitched on.● The system has detected a road lane mark-ing on both sides of the vehicle.


SOS

Emergency Assist not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A rele-vant warning is also displayed on the instru-ment panel screen.

● The field of vision of the camera is dirty.Clean the windscreen.

● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to weather factors, e.g. snow, or deter-gent residue or some coating. Clean thewindscreen.● The visibility of the camera is diminisheddue to accessories or adhesives. Leave thearea around the camera’s field of vision free.● The camera has been altered or damaged,e.g. because of damage caused to the wind-screen. Check for visible damage.● There is a fault or defect. Switch the engineoff and on again.● If the fault continues, disconnect theEmergency Assist and consult a specialisedworkshop.

WARNINGThe smart technology fitted into the Emer-gency Assist cannot overcome the limitsimposed by the laws of physics; it onlyworks within the limits of the system. Thedriver is responsible for driving the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and safety distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● The Emergency Assist cannot alwaysavoid accidents or serious injuries by itself.● If possible, do not wear gloves while driv-ing. The system could interpret this as nodriving activity.

238


● If the radar sensor or the camera are cov-ered or have been altered or damaged, thesystem may intervene on the brakes or onthe direction in an inappropriate manner.● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNINGIf the Emergency Assist Intervenes inop-portunely, serious accidents and injuriesmay occur.● If the vehicle behaves differently than ex-pected, interrupt the intervention of theEmergency Assist by over-accelerating,braking or moving the steering wheel.● Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Note● Automatic interventions by the Emergen-cy Assist on the brakes may be interruptedby pressing the accelerator or brake or bymoving the wheel.● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressingthe accelerator or the break, moving thesteering wheel or pressing the hazardwarning light switch.

● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to acomplete stop.● When the Emergency Assist is activated,it is only available again after the ignitionhas been switched off and back on again.

Side Assist with Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA)*

Introduction

The lane departure warning (LCA) helpsdetect traffic that is at the rear of the vehi-cle.

The rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) helpsthe driver when backing out of a parallelparking spot and when manoeuvring.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe blind spot detector (BSD) with parkingassistance (RCTA) included cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if the blind spot detection system orthe rear cross traffic alert are used negli-gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.

● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● Pay attention to the indicator lamps thatmay come on in the external rear view mir-rors and on the instrument cluster, and fol-low any instructions they may give.● The lane departure warning could reactto any special constructions that might bepresent to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. highor irregular dividers. This may cause erro-neous warnings.● Never use the lane departure warning onunpaved roads. The lane departure warninghas been designed for use on paved roads.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● The control lamps of the lane departurewarning may have limited functionality dueto solar radiation.

NoteIf the blind spot detector with parking as-sistant does not work as described in thischapter, stop using it and contact a special-ised workshop.

239

Driving

Control lamp

Fig. 170 Control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing.

Fig. 171 Control lamp of the lane departure warn-ing.

indicator lamp in external rear view mir-rors:

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning isactivated and ready to operate, i.e. when activating thesystem.

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warninghas detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane andthe turn signal has been engaged in the direction ofthe detected vehicle ››› .

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane Assist››› page 233, a warning to switch lanes will also appeareven though the turn signal has not been engaged(Lane Assist “Plus” ››› page 241 ).


If there are no indications from the controllamp of the lane departure warning, thismeans that the lane departure warning hasnot detected any other vehicles at the reararea ››› .

When the exterior lighting is low, the intensi-ty with which the control lamps come on isdimmed. The user can modify the intensityof the control lamps with up to 5 levels in theinfotainment system menu.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and the correspondingmessages are ignored when they light up,the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-sages.● Carry out the necessary operations.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the control lamps and cor-responding text messages when they lightup may result in damage to the vehicle.

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

The lane departure warning uses radar sen-sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle››› page 7. The system does this by measur-ing the vehicle's distance from other vehiclesand its speed differential. The lane departurewarning will not work at speeds of less thanapprox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system usesoptical signals in the external rear view mir-rors to notify the driver.

The lane width is not detected individually,but is rather pre-configured in the system.Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be-tween two lanes, the indications may be in-correct. Furthermore, the system can detectvehicles driving in the lane next to you (if

240


there are any), and can also detect stationaryobjects such as dividers, and thus give an in-correct indication.

Indication on the exterior mirrorThe control lamp provides an indication onthe corresponding side regarding the trafficsituation behind the vehicle, if it is deemedto be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand side ››› Fig. 170 indicates the traffic sit-uation to the rear left of the vehicle, and thecontrol lamp of the right-hand side››› Fig. 171, indicates the traffic situation tothe rear right of the vehicle.

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows orwindows with tinted film, the indications ofthe external mirrors may not be seen clearlyor correctly.

Keep the external mirrors clean and free ofsnow and ice, and do not cover them withadhesives or other similar materials.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used byactivating the Lane Assist ››› page 233 andSide Assist functions. In this case its func-tions are expanded as described below.

If the driver initiates a lane change manoeu-vre in a potential critical situation:

● The lamp flashes in the correspondingrear-view mirror even though the turn signalhas not been activated.● The steering wheel vibrates to warn thedriver of the risk of collision.● torque is applied to correct the steeringand return the vehicle to its lane.

Driving situations

Fig. 172 Schematic representation: Passing sit-uation with traffic behind the vehicle. Indica-tion from the blind spot detector in the left-handexternal mirror.

Fig. 173 Schematic representation: Situation ofpassing and then moving into the right-hand lane. Indication from the blind spot detector in theright-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication willbe displayed in the external mirror››› Fig. 172 (arrow) or ››› Fig. 173 (ar-row):

● When being overtaken by another vehicle››› Fig. 172 .● When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 173 with a speed differential of approx.10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a »

241

Driving

considerably higher speed, no indication willbe displayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon-er an indication will be displayed in the exter-nal mirror, because the blind spot detectortakes into account the speed differential withother vehicles. Thus even though the dis-tance from the other vehicle is identical, theindication will appear sooner in some casesand later in others.

Physical limitations inherent to the systemIn some situations the lane departure warn-ing may not interpret the traffic situationcorrectly. I.e. in the following situations:

● on tight bends;● in the case of lanes with different widths;● in areas with significant gradient changes;● in adverse weather conditions;● in the case of special constructions to theside of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular di-viders.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

Fig. 174 Schematic representation of the rearcross traffic alert assistant: zone monitored aroundthe vehicle while leaving a parking space.

Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rearbumper ››› page 217 to monitor the trafficcrossing behind the vehicle as it backs out ofa parallel parking space or as it is being man-oeuvred, for example in very low visibilityconditions.

When the system detects a relevant vehicleon the road that is approaching the rear ofthe vehicle ››› Fig. 174 , an acoustic alarmmay sound if the relevance so requires it.

In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver isalso informed by means of a visual signal oninfotainment system display. This signal is

displayed in the form of a red or yellow stripat the back of the image of the vehicle onthe infotainment system screen. This stripdisplays the side of the vehicle towards whichtraffic is approaching in transverse direc-tion1).

Automatic braking to reduce damagesIf the rear cross traffic alert detects thatsomeone else on the road is approachingthe rear of the vehicle and the driver doesnot step on the brake, the system will engagethe brakes automatically.

The parking system helps the driver by auto-matically engaging the brakes to reduce anydamage. The automatic intervention on thebrakes takes place when driving in reverse atapprox. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detectingthat the vehicle is stationary, the systemkeeps it that way for around 2 seconds.

After automatically braking to reduce dam-age, the system will not be able to automati-cally brake again for approximately 10 sec-onds.

You can interrupt the automatic braking bystepping hard on the accelerator pedal orthe brake pedal in order to regain control ofthe vehicle.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equippedwith a parking system.

242


WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe rear cross traffic alert cannot overcomethe limits imposed by the laws of physics; itonly works within the limits of the system.The parking assistant function should nottempt you into taking any risks. The systemis not a replacement for driver awareness.● The system should never be used in limi-ted visibility conditions or complicatedtraffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or whencrossing multiple lanes.● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi-cle's surroundings, since the system oftenfails to detect things such as bicycles or pe-destrians.● The rear cross traffic alert itself will notbrake the vehicle to a complete stop.

Managing the assist systems

Enabling and disabling the assist systemsThe blind spot detector with parking assis-tant can be switched on and off by accessingthe Assistance systems menu on the dashpanel display using the steering wheel con-trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi-function camera, it can also be accessed bymeans of the driver assistance systems keylocated on the main beam headlight lever.

Open the Assistants menu.● Side Assist● Rear cross traffic alert

If the verification box on the instrument pan-el or the infotainment system is checked ,the functionality will be automatically activa-ted when switching on the ignition.

When the blind spot detector is ready to op-erate, the indications in the external mirrorswill turn on briefly as confirmation.

When the vehicle is restarted, the last ad-justment in the system will remain active.

Trailer modeThe Blind spot detector and the rear crosstraffic alert will be automatically deactivatedand it will be impossible to activate them ifthe tow hitch is electrically connected to atrailer or other similar object.

As soon as the driver starts to drive with atrailer connected electrically to the vehicle, amessage will appear on the instrument paneldisplay indicating that the blind spot detec-tor and the rear cross traffic alert are deacti-vated. Once the trailer has been unhitchedfrom the vehicle, if you want to use the blindspot detector and the rear cross traffic alert,you will have to reactivate them in the corre-sponding menu.

If the towing hitch is not factory equipped,then the blind spot detector and the rear

cross traffic alert will have to be deactivatedmanually when driving with a trailer.

243

Driving

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 295 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake ››› page 246 .The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

It lights up green

Auto Hold function activated ››› page 247 .

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 295, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.

● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this functionfails, the rear wheels can lock up. Undercertain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.● If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-panied by a warning message on the instru-ment panel display, please go immediatelyto a specialised workshop to check thebrake pads and to replace them if they areworn.

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and needto be “run in” first. However, you can com-pensate for the slightly reduced braking ef-fect by applying more pressure on the brakepedal. Avoid overloading the brakes whilerunning them in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This isa particular problem in urban traffic andshort stretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (e.g. tem-perature, air humidity, etc.) noises may beproduced when braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wip-ers activated, the brake pads will brieflytouch the brake discs. This takes place, al-though unnoticeable to the driver, at regularintervals to improve the response time of thebrakes when they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is drivenfor some distance without using the brakeswhen there is a lot of salt on the road in win-ter. The layer of salt that accumulates on thediscs and pads can be removed by gently ap-plying the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

244

Braking and parking

If the brakes are not used frequently, or ifrust has formed on the disks, it is advisable toclean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply morepressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reduced

braking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking dis-tance will increase. Apply and then releasethe brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air tothe front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

245

Driving

Electronic parking brake

Fig. 175 In the lower part of the centre console:electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake ››› .

Applying the electronic parking brakeThe electronic parking brake can be activa-ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-cle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 175 button.● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of button ››› Fig. 175 (arrow) ison and the red control lamp on the instru-ment panel is always on.● Release the button.

Disconnecting the electronic parkingbrake● Switch the ignition on.● Press the button ››› Fig. 175 . At thesame time step hard on the brake pedal or, ifthe engine is running, press the acceleratorpedal slightly.● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 175 (ar-row) and the red control lamp on the in-strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-ing brake upon moving offThe electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driv-er's door is closed and the driver's seat beltfastened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● A gear range is engaged or switched to an-other one and the accelerator pedal is lightlypressed.● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

The parking brake can be prevented frombeing automatically released by continuouslypulling up the ››› Fig. 175 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy load istowed ››› page 273 .

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when exiting the vehicle in-correctlyIn vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.● AND: the vehicle is stationary.● AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake functionOnly use the emergency brake function ifyou are unable to stop the vehicle with thefoot brake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 175 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.● To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

246

Braking and parking

WARNINGThe improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances,only the rear wheels brake. Always use thefoot brake.● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and the en-gine is running. The vehicle could move,even if the electronic parking brake is acti-vated.● When the electronic parking brake isswitched on or off, there is a slight move-ment of the brake pedal. Be careful not toposition your foot under the pedal.

CAUTIONTo prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply theelectronic parking brake and then removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

Note● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic park-ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 50 .● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.

● The system performs automatic and au-dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-cle if some time elapses without the elec-tronic parking brake being used.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 176 In the lower part of the centre console:Auto Hold function button.

The indicator lamp of the ››› Fig. 176 but-ton remains on when the Auto Hold functionis connected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for ex-ample, when going up a slope, when stop-ped at traffic lights or in heavy traffic with in-termittent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold functionautomatically prevents the vehicle from roll-

ing when stationary without pressing thebrake pedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, theAuto Hold function holds the vehicle. Thedriver can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the acceleratorpedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-ing, the Auto Hold function releases thebrake. The vehicle moves according to theslope of the road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of theconditions required by the Auto Hold func-tion is impaired, it disconnects itself and thebutton's control light goes out ››› Fig. 176 .The electronic parking brake connects auto-matically, if necessary, to park the vehiclesafely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-ary with the Auto Hold function● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on andoffPress the button ››› . The control lampon the button goes out when the Auto Holdfunction is switched off. »

247

Driving

Automatically engaging and disengagingthe Auto Hold functionIf the Auto Hold function was switched on viathe button before switching the ignitionoff, the function will remain on the followingtime the ignition is switched on.

If the Auto Hold function was not switchedon, it will automatically remain off next timethe ignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects auto-matically if the following conditions aremet (all points must be met at the sametime ››› ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with thebrake pedal on a flat surface or on aslope.The engine rotates “correctly”.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 247, Conditions for keepingthe vehicle stationary with the Au-to Hold function are no longer met.If the engine is running irregularly or ananomaly is detected.If the engine is turned off or stalls.If the accelerator is pressed

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.4.

If any of the tyres has only minimal con-tact with the ground, e.g. in the case ofaxle articulation.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Auto Hold function cannot defy thelaws of physics; it only works within the lim-its of the system. The greater convenienceprovided by the Auto Hold function shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety.● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.● The Auto Hold function cannot alwayskeep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, onslippery or frozen surfaces.

NoteBefore entering a car wash, always switchoff the Auto Hold function, because if theelectronic parking brake is automaticallyconnected, it may cause damage.

5. Stabilisation and brake assis-tance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused bythe system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If the ABSfails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

ESC manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 250 .

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together whenthe ignition is switched on and should turnoff after approximately 2 seconds. This is thetime taken for the function check.

248

Braking and parking

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabil-ity and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheel-spin on the driving wheels. It stabilises thevehicle by braking individual wheels or by re-ducing the engine torque. The warning lampwill flash on the instrument panel when theESC is intervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (ASR), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque con-trol (XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitiga-tion*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle by chang-ing the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable ››› page 250 .

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steerthe vehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and donot pump the brakes. You will feel the brakepedal pulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could beseverely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)In the event of the wheels spinning, the ASRreduces the engine torque to adapt to theroad condition. This helps the car to startmoving, accelerate or climb a gradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is ac-tive up to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the brakedwheel from overheating, the EDL cuts outautomatically if subjected to excessive loads.The vehicle can still be driven. The EDL willswitch on again automatically when thebrake has cooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries ››› page 279 .

Electronic engine torque management(XDS)When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higherspeed than the inner wheel. In this way, thewheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.This may mean that in certain situations thetorque delivered to the inner wheel is toohigh, causing the wheels to spin. On the oth-er hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lowerdrive torque than it could transmit. This cancause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in thiscase the front axle, which results in under-steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effectvia the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the requestedtrajectory is much more precise. »

249

Driving

XDS works in combination with the ESC andis always active, even when ASR is switchedoff, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-connected.

Multi-collision brakeThe multi-collision brake consists of auto-matic braking activated by the Airbag controlunit. It is activated when, in the event of anaccident, the Airbag control unit detects de-celerations above the activation level, andbraking is managed by the ESC system.

In the event of an accident, the multi-colli-sion brake can help the driver by braking toavoid the risk of skidding during the accidentand causing other collisions.

The following actions control automaticbraking during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif there is an anomaly in the ESC system.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle control

and serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-ic torque control systems cannot exceedthe limits imposed by the laws of physics.Always bear this in mind, especially on wetor slippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, especiallyin corners or on a slippery road, or if youfollow too close behind the vehicle in frontof you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist, EDS andthe electronic torque control system can-not prevent accidents: risk of accidents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to reduceengine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises due to their operation.

● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 81 .● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting theESC

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in“Sport” mode● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-nected and connected using the infotain-ment system ››› page 84 . In vehicles with adriver information system* the correspond-ing indication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the ESCinterventions are limited and the ASR is com-pletely disconnected. In addition, the con-trol lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESCIn some versions of the model, besides thetraction control system (ASR), the electronic

250

Braking and parking

stability programme (ESC) can also beswitched off.

● The ESC can be activated or deactivated inthe infotainment system using the functionbutton > Driver assistance > ESC menu››› page 88. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indicationwill be displayed.

When the ESC is disconnected the controlwarning lamp lights up on the instrumentpanel.

ESC in “Offroad” modeTurn the Driving Experience button to selectthe Offroad mode and connect it››› page 212. The interventions of the ASR, aswell as of the EDS and the ABS system adaptto irregular terrain.

In the following exceptional situations it maymake sense to activate the Offroad mode toallow the wheels to spin:

● When “swinging” the vehicle to get it un-stuck.● Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.● When driving on rough terrain with muchof the car's weight is lifted off the wheels(axle articulation).● Steep descents with braking on unpavedterrain.

For your safety we recommend that you turnoff the Offroad mode when it is not abso-lutely necessary.

To disconnect the “Offroad” mode, select adifferent driving mode.

ESC in “Snow” modeTurn the Driving Experience button to selectthe “Snow” mode and connect it››› page 212. Traction control system (ASR)interventions adjust to the adhesion ofsnowy roads.

To disconnect the “Snow” mode, select adifferent driving mode.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta-bilisation function is not available.

WARNINGYou should only activate the Offroad Modeor disable the ASR if the experience of thedriver and traffic conditions allow it. Dan-ger of skidding!

● With the Offroad mode activated, thestabilisation function is limited. In particu-lar, if the road is too smooth and slippery,the driving wheels could spin and the vehi-cle could skid.

Note● If the ESC Sport mode is selected, cruisecontrol* will be switched off.● In ESC OFFmode, the ESC will be tempo-rarily reactivated to assist the driver duringbraking and will then switch back to passivemode when the brake pedal is released (de-pending on the model version).

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Connect the electronic parking brake››› page 246.● Set the selector lever to the P position. »

251

Driving

● Stop the engine and turn off the ignition.Turn the steering wheel slightly to engagethe steering lock.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centreof the road.

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to open doorsor windows. Locked doors hinder the possi-bility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Assisted parking system (ParkAssist)*

Introduction

The parking assist system is an additionalfunction of the ParkPilot ››› page 258 andhelps the driver find a suitable parking spacefrom among the following types:

● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen-dicular and parallel spaces,● park driving forwards in suitable perpen-dicular spaces,● exit a parking space driving forwards from aparallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and fac-tory infotainment system, the front, rear andside areas are represented, and the positionof obstacles is shown relative to the vehicle.

The Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system and its userequires special attention by the driver ››› .

WARNINGThe technology used in the park assist sys-tem involves a series of limitations inherent

in the actual system and in the use of ultra-sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Any accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect, at leastcorrectly, these objects or people wearingsuch clothes.● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-ted by external sound sources. In certaincircumstances this may prevent them fromdetecting people or objects.● The ultrasound sensors may have blindspots in which obstacles and people are notdetected.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the ultrasound sensors do notdetect small children, animals or certainobjects in all situations.

WARNINGQuick turns of the steering wheel whenparking or exiting a parking space with ParkAssist can cause serious injury.

252

Help with parking and manoeuvring

● Do not hold the steering wheel duringmanoeuvres to park or exit a parking spaceuntil the system requests it. Doing so disa-bles the system during the manoeuvre, re-sulting in the parking being cancelled.

CAUTION● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonicsensors do not detect objects such as trail-er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees,or an open (or opening) rear lid, whichcould damage the vehicle.● Retrofitting of certain accessories to thevehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may inter-fere with the operation of the Park Assistsystem and cause damage.● The Park Assist system uses as a refer-ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob-jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheelsare not damaged while parking. If necessa-ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma-noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle.● The ultrasound sensors on the bumpermay be damaged or shifted in the event of acollision, for example, when entering or ex-iting a parking space.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, donot apply it directly unless very briefly andalways from a distance of more than 10 cm.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront with larger than the space for the reg-

istration plate, or a registration plate that iscurved or warped can cause:– False detections.– The sensors to lose visibility.– Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre

or defective parking.● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam-aged, the area corresponding to that groupof sensors (front or rear) is deactivated andcannot be activated until the fault is cor-rected. However, you can still use the sen-sors of the other bumper as per usual. Ifthere is a fault in the system, consult a spe-cialist workshop. To do so, CUPRA recom-mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealeror any SEAT dealership.

Note● In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the ultrasound sensors of thebumper clean, free of snow or ice, and donot cover them with adhesives or other ob-jects.● Certain sources of noise, such as roughasphalt or paving stones and the noise ofother vehicles can induce the Park Assistsystem or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn-ings. The presence of metal objects can al-so affect the manoeuvre.● To become familiar with the system andits functions, CUPRA recommends that youpractice operating the Park Assist system in

an area where there is not too much trafficor in a car park.

Description of the parking assist sys-tem

Fig. 177 In the upper part of the centre console:button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist systemare the ultrasonic sensors located in thefront and rear bumpers, the ››› Fig. 177 toswitch the system on and off and the mes-sages on the instrument cluster display.

Prerequisites for parking● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 250 .● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace (parallel parking): do not exceed ap-prox. 40 km/h (25 mph). »

253

Driving

● Speed when passing next to the parkingspace (angle parking): do not exceed ap-prox. 20 km/h (12 mph).● Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me-tres when driving past the parking space.● Space length (parallel parking): vehiclelength + 0.8 meters.● Space width (angle parking): vehicle width+ 0.8 meters.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when parking.

Requirements for leaving the parkingspace (only for parallel parking)● The traction control system (ASR) must beturned on ››› page 250 .● Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5metres.● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h(4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in-terrupting the manoeuvres for parking orexiting a parking spacePark Assist interrupts the manoeuvres forparking or exiting a parking space in any ofthe following cases:

● Press the button.● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h(4 mph).

● The driver takes control of the steeringwheel.● The parking manoeuvre does not endwithin 6 minutes from the activation of auto-matic steering.● There is a fault in the system (the system istemporarily unavailable).● The ASR is disconnected.● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation.● The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary thatnone of these things occur and that the button is pressed again.

Special characteristicsThe Park Assist system is subject to certainlimitations inherent to the system. For exam-ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or ex-it a parking space on sharp bends.

While entering or exiting a parking space, abrief signal sounds to prompt the driver tochange between forward and reverse gears(depending on the case). In successive ma-noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver tochange gears, at the latest, when the contin-uous audible signal is given (object presentat a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer-ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in-strument panel also displays the symbol .

Keep the brake pedal depressed while thesymbol remains on the dash panel display toturn the wheels with the vehicle stopped.This way, the system will require fewer ma-noeuvres to complete the parking action.

Trailer modeThe Park Assist system cannot be switchedon if the factory-fitted towing bracket››› page 273 is electrically connected to atrailer.

After changing a wheelIf, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stopsentering and exiting parking spaces correct-ly, the circumference of the new wheel maybe different and the system may need toadapt to it. The adaptation is automatic andtakes place during driving. Making turnsslowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12mph]) for a few minutes may contribute tothis adaptation process ››› in Introduc-tion on page 252.

254


Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 178 On the instrument panel display: view ofthe parking assist system with reduced view.

Fig. 179 On the instrument panel display: indica-tion of parking modes.

Parking assist has the following 3 parkingmodes:

Reverse parallel parking.Reverse angle parking.Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking mode after passing infront of the spaceAfter activating the Park Assist system andafter detecting a parking space, the displayon the instrument panel proposes a parkingmode. The Park Assist system selects theparking mode automatically. The selectedmode is shown on the instrument panel dis-play ››› Fig. 178 . The reduced display of oth-er possible parking modes is also shown››› Fig. 179. If the mode selected by the sys-tem does not correspond to the desiredmode, you can select another mode bypressing the button ››› Fig. 177 .

● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 253 .● Press the button.● A control lamp on the button lights upwhen the system is switched on. Additionally,the selected parking mode is shown on theinstrument panel display and the reduceddisplay shows another parking mode it canbe changed to.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the side of the road where you areparking. The instrument panel displays theside corresponding to the road. By default, if

the turn signal is not on, it parks on the rightin the direction of traffic.● If necessary, press the button again tochange to the next parking mode.● Once you have switched to all possibleparking modes, if the button is pressedagain, the system switches off.● Press the button again to switch the sys-tem back on.● Follow the instructions displayed on the in-strument panel while paying attention totraffic and drive the vehicle past the parkingspace.

Special case of perpendicular parkingspace to park forwards without drivingpast first● The necessary conditions to park with ParkAssist have to be met ››› page 253 .● Move forward towards the parking spacewhile paying attention to traffic and stop thevehicle with the front part partially inside theparking space.● Press the button once.● A control lamp on the button lights upwhen the system is switched on. Additionally,the selected parking mode is shown on theinstrument panel display without reduceddisplay.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 252.

255

Driving

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 180 On the instrument panel display: parallelparking. Finding a parking space. Parking posi-tion. Manoeuvring.

Fig. 181 On the instrument panel display: angleparking. Finding a parking space. Parking posi-tion. Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwardsYour vehicleParking space detectedMessage to parkMessage to press the brake pedalProgress bar

1

2

3

4

5

6

The necessary conditions have to be met topark with Park Assist ››› page 253 and theparking mode must be selected ››› page 255 .

Parking● Look at the display on the instrument pan-el to see if the space has been detected as“appropriate” and if the correct position forparking has been reached ››› Fig. 180 or ››› Fig. 181 . The space is considered

“appropriate” if the display on the instru-ment panel shows the message to park 4 .● Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause,engage the reverse gear.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 252.● Please note the following message: Inter-vention in active direction. Watchyour surroundings!. While you keep

256


watch around you, carefully start accelerat-ing up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). Dur-ing the parking manoeuvre, the system onlytakes charge of the steering. You, as thedriver, have to accelerate, engage theclutch if necessary, change gears andbrake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the indicationto move forward appears on the instrumentpanel display ››› Fig. 180 or ››› Fig. 181 ;OR: reverse until the Park Assist finish-ed message appears on the instrument pan-el display. The progress bar 6 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 257 .● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: until the symbol goes out onthe instrument panel screen.● Select first gear.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi-lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until thereverse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it centresit in the space ››› Fig. 180 or ››› Fig. 181 .● For best results, wait at the end of eachmanoeuvre until the Park Assist system hasfinished turning the steering wheel. Theparking manoeuvre ends when a corre-sponding message is displayed on the instru-ment panel and, in some cases, an acousticsignal sounds.

Progress barsThe progress bar››› Fig. 180 6 and ››› Fig. 181 6 on thescreen of the instrument panel displays therelative distance to be covered. The greaterthe distance, the fuller the progress bar.When driving forward, the content of theprogress bar decreases upwards, and whenreversing, it decreases downwards.

NoteIf the manoeuvre is terminated premature-ly during parking, the result may not be thebest.

Leaving a parking space with theparking assist system (only for parallelparking)

Fig. 182 On the instrument panel display: exit aparallel parking space.

Your vehicle in reverse gearMessage giving the proposed manoeuvreto exit the parking spaceProgress bar to indicate the distance leftto cover

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)The necessary conditions to exit a parkingspace with Park Assist have to be met››› page 254.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 177 . A controllamp on the button lights up when thesystem is switched on.● Turn on the corresponding turn signal to-wards the road you will enter when exitingthe parking space.● Select reverse gear.● Release the steering wheel ››› in Intro-duction on page 252. Please note the fol-lowing message: Automatic steering en-abled. Pay attention to your sur-roundings. While you keep watch aroundyou, carefully start accelerating up to nomore than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting theparking space, the system only takes chargeof the steering. You, as the driver, have toaccelerate, engage the clutch if necessary,change gears and brake.● Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot sig-nal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrumentpanel display shows the forward indication. »

1

2

3

257

Driving

The progress bar ››› Fig. 182 3 indicates thedistance to cover ››› page 257 .● Press the brake pedal until the parking as-sist system completes the steering wheelturns; OR: press the brake pedal until thesymbol goes out on the instrument clusterscreen.● Move forward until the continuous ParkPi-lot signal sounds; OR: move forward until thereverse indication appears on the instrumentpanel display. The Park Assist system steersthe vehicle forward and back until it can exitthe space.● The vehicle can exit the space when a cor-responding message is displayed on the in-strument panel and, in some cases, anacoustic signal sounds. Take charge of thesteering with the turning angle set by thePark Assist system.● Paying attention to the traffic, exit theparking space.

Automatic operation of the brakes bythe parking assist system

Park Assist helps the driver by automaticallybraking in certain situations.

The driver is always responsible for braking intime ››› .

Automatic braking intervention to avoidexceeding the speed limitTo avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap-prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leav-ing a parking space, the brakes may activateautomatically. After automatically activatingthe brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit aparking space may continue.

The brakes are only automatically activatedonce for each attempt to enter or exit aparking space. If the speed of approximately7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the cor-responding operation is halted.

Automatic braking to reduce damagesDepending on certain conditions, the ParkAssist system can automatically brake the ve-hicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly ac-tioning and holding down the brake ped-al ››› . Following this the driver must pressthe brake pedal.

Automatic braking intervention to reducedamage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin-ishing.

WARNINGThe automatic braking intervention by ParkAssist should never tempt you to take anyrisk that may compromise safety. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.

● The Park Assist system is subject to cer-tain limitations inherent to the system. Incertain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● The automatic braking intervention willend after approximately 1.5 seconds. After-wards, brake the vehicle yourself.

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction

These assist systems help you when parkingand manoeuvring:

– Plus Parking Aid ››› page 260 . It is an assis-tant that gives a visual and audio warningof obstacles detected in front and behindthe vehicle ››› page 260 .

– Rear Parking Aid ››› page 263 . An audioand visual assistant that warns of obstacleslocated behind the vehicle ››› page 263 .

WARNING● Always pay attention, by looking directly,to traffic and the area around the vehicle.Assistance systems are not a replacement

258


for driver awareness. Responsibility alwayslies with the driver.● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not detected. Payspecial attention to children and animals.● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking distance warning system functionscan be affected by different factors thatcan cause damage:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the sen-

sors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and garmentsdo not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig-nals. The system cannot detect these ob-jects or people wearing such clothes cor-rectly.● Sensor signals may be affected by exter-nal sound sources. This may prevent themfrom detecting people or objects.● If the system warns you of the proximityof a low obstacle, please note that after be-

ing detected by the system, the obstacle inquestion may disappear from the measure-ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer,and the system will no longer warn of itspresence. In certain circumstances, objectssuch as high kerbs that could damage theunderside of the vehicle are not detected.● If the parking distance warning system isignored, the vehicle could suffer consider-able damage.● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● The display on the Infotainment systemscreen shows a slight time delay.● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area:– Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces

with long grass.– External ultrasound sources, such as

other vehicles equipped with ultra-sound systems.

– Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense ex-haust gases.

– If the number plate is not properly se-cured to the surface of the bumper.

– Gradient changes.● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● We recommend that you practice parkingin an area without traffic.● The volume and tone of the signals andindications can be changed ››› page 264 .● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 264 .

259

Driving

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 183 Parking aid view on the Infotainment sys-tem display.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by givingvisual and audio warnings about obstaclesdetected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. Whenan obstacle is detected, it is indicated by au-dible signals and in the Infotainment system››› Fig. 183.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is pos-sible to know if the obstacle is in front of thevehicle or behind it by choosing differentsounds.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 mA

1.60 m0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of thevehicle, the vehicle must be moved a fewmetres forwards or backwards. Thus, themissing areas are screened and obstacles atthe sides of the vehicle are displayed C .

Special features of ParkPilot with AreaViewIn the following situations the screened areaon the side of the vehicle is automaticallyhidden:

● When a vehicle door is opened.● When the ASR is switched off.● When there is ASR or ESC regulation.● If the vehicle remains stationary for morethan approximately 3 minutes.

B

C

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 184 Centre console: parking aid button (de-pending on the version).

Manually connecting and disconnectingthe parking aid● Press the button once.

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of thefactory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Select reverse gear.● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of lessthan 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en-countered, it is detected when it is approx.less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic con-nection is activated, a reduced view is shown.● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

260


Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.● OR: move the selector lever to position P.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the car icon on the reducedview.

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up when the sys-tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-matically, a diagram of the vehicle and thesegments will appear on screen.

It only operates every time the speed is re-duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the firsttime.

If it is switched off using the button, oneof the following actions must be taken for itto reactivate automatically:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)approx.● OR: move the lever into position P andpack again.● OR: switch the automatic activation on andoff in the Infotainment system.

The automatic activation of the parking aidcan be switched on and off in the Infotain-ment system››› page 84››› page 88 :

● Switch the ignition on.● Select: Infotainment button > SETTINGS> Parking and manoeuvring.● Select Automatic activation. If the box ischecked, the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible soundwarning will only be given when obstacles infront are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-prox.

CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-

stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Visual indication segments


The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

White and grey: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.They are also displayed when the elec-tronic parking brake is activated.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away. »

–

–

–

261

Driving

A wake will indicate the anticipated forwardor backward trajectory, depending on theengaged gear.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,the corresponding audible warning willsound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Inthe collision zone, the obstacles are repre-sented in red (including those out of thepath). Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introductionon page 258, ››› in Introduction onpage 259 !

In the event the car is equipped with the TopView Camera system, Park Assist visual guid-ance will appear in accordance with the viewselected in the Top View Camera system.

Setting the indications and audio sig-nals

The displays and audio signal settings are setin the infotainment system ››› page 84 .

Setup

Automatic activa-tion On/off

Front volume* Volume in the front and reararea.

Rear volume* Volume in the rear area.

Setup

Adjust volume

When the parking aid isswitched on, the volume ofthe audio source will be re-duced, depending on the se-lected option.

Front sound set-tings/sharpness* Sound tone in the front area.

Rear sound set-tings/sharpness* Sound tone in the rear area.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument cluster in Park Assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inarea A are displayed ››› Fig. 183 . If a frontsensor is faulty, only the obstacles in area Bare displayed. Symbol is displayed.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe-cialised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

Fig. 186 Parking assist display on the screen withtrailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,when the trailer is connected, the rear sen-sors will not activate when reverse gear is en-gaged or button is pressed. Therefore,any objects behind or to the side of the vehi-cle will not be indicated on the screen andno audio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detectedat the front, and the vehicle's trajectory willbe hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function*

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvring

262


function activates emergency braking whenit detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s paththat could cause a collision, driving forwardsor in reverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aidis activated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-tween 2.5-10 km/h (1.5-6 mph) for the frontarea and between 1.5-10 km/h (1-6 mph) forthe rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations ap-ply.

The braking while manoeuvring function isset in the Infotainment system: function but-ton > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-noeuvring.

● on – permits the use of the brakingwhile manoeuvring function.● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theBraking while manoeuvring button that ap-

pears on the Parking aid screen of the Info-tainment system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an optical and audi-ble assistant that warns of obstacles locatedbehind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible and visible warnings onthe Infotainment system.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, the rearparking aid will issue an audible warningabout objects near the rear of the vehicle,and the Top View Camera* image will beavailable on the infotainment screen, giving areal image of the objects around the car.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 316 .

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

● Side area: 0.60 m

● Central area: 1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 258,››› in Introduction on page 259!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection● Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection● Position the selector lever in P, N or D.

Set the lever to the N or D position to main-tain the system active for approximately 8seconds before switching off. During thattime, Parking assist will switch off if:

● The selector lever is moved to position P.● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx.15 km/h (9 mph) or faster.

If the Top View Camera* is installed, rearparking aid will be automatically deactivatedwhen disengaging reverse gear. »

263

Driving

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of thefactory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button. If you havethe Top View Camera* system installed, youcannot use the temporary suppression ofsound in Parking Aid.

Change from reduced view to full view● Select reverse gear.● OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist(Rear View Camera “RVC”) click on the caricon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the RVC function button.

Setting the indications and audio signalsThe indications and audio signal settings arein the infotainment system ››› page 84 .

● Rear volume*: volume in the rear area.● Rear sound settings/treble*: soundtone in the rear area.

● Lower volume: when the parking aid isswitched on, the volume of the audio sourcewill be reduced, depending on the selectedoption.

Error messagesIf a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument cluster in Park Assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol isdisplayed on the infotainment system dis-play.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a spe-cialised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing deviceIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected, the parking aid will not be activa-ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Visual indication segments


The distance to the obstacles can be estima-ted with the help of the segments at the rearof the vehicle.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

White segments: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.They are also displayed when the elec-tronic parking brake is activated.Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

–

–

–

264


Whenever the obstacle is located in the ve-hicle’s direction of travel, the correspondingaudible warning will sound.

As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, thesegments are displayed closer to the vehicle.When the penultimate segment is displayed,this means that the vehicle has reached thecollision zone. In the collision zone, the ob-stacles are represented in red (includingthose out of the path). Do not continue toreverse ››› in Introduction on page 258,››› in Introduction on page 259!

If you are equipped with the Top ViewCamera*Segments are not displayed when the vehi-cle is equipped with Top View Camera*.

The Parking Aid system will issue an audiblewarning for objects that are near the rear ofthe vehicle, and the Top View Camera* im-age will be available on the screen, giving areal image of the objects around the car.

Trailer Assist

Introduction

Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse andmanoeuvre with a trailer.

By moving the rotary knob of the exteriormirrors, the trailer assist directs the trailerthat is hitched. The driver has to accelerate,change gears and brake!

System limitationsUnder certain circumstances, the cameradoes not detect objects such as trailer drawbars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or anopen (or opening) rear lid, which could dam-age the vehicle.

In order to guarantee good system opera-tion, keep the camera clean, free of snow orice, and do not cover it with adhesives orother objects. Do not allow the draw bar tobe covered by external influences.

Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant onlywhen the rear lid is closed correctly.

CAUTIONThe trailer maneuver assistant does nottake the vehicle’s surrounding as a refer-ence. No obstacle detection takes place.The driver alone has to assess whether it ispossible to manoeuvre safely with the towvehicle and trailer set.● Always observe the movement of thetrailer and, if necessary, actively interruptthe manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even ifthe trailer manoeuvring assistant is operat-ed correctly, on rare occasions the trailermay move in a different way to the setting.

● Do not rely solely on the indications onthe instrument cluster display.

NoteThe trailer manoeuvre assistant automati-cally switches off approx. 10 minutes afterbeing activated. The assistant is also deac-tivated if the driver does not perform anyaction over the course of approx. 3 mi-nutes.

Requirements

The following requirements must be met forthe trailer manoeuvre assistant to work:

● The engine is running.● The ESC must be connected.● The driver's door and the rear lid areclosed.● The exterior mirrors are not folded.● There is a non-articulated one or two axletrailer hitched and electrically connected.● Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stop-ped.● The maximum bending angle has not beenexceeded.● The length of the trailer’s drawbar hasbeen determined. »

265

Driving

Determine the length of the trailer's draw-barIn order for the trailer manoeuvre assistantto determine the length of the trailer’s draw-bar, drive the vehicle-trailer set throughsome turning manoeuvres or curves. Themore precisely the length of the drawbar isdetermined, the wider the angles that will beavailable when manoeuvring. The assistantsubdivides the maximum available end stopsof the angle indicator into four levels: ap-prox. 30°, 45°, 60° and 75°.

NoteFor technical reasons, the trailer manoeu-vre assistant cannot always correctly detecttrailers with LED technology taillights.

Operating

Fig. 188 Rotary exterior mirror controls.: adjustthe trailer angle.

Fig. 189 Instrument panel display: engage reversegear

Key of the Fig. 188, ››› Fig. 189 :Rotary exterior mirror controls.Trailer orientation to the leftTrailer orientation to the rightMove the vehicle in the direction of thetowing device.Actual trailer positionTarget trailer positionAngle indicator zero position

Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailersetThe system requirements must be met››› page 265.

● Select reverse gear.● Press button .● Release the steering wheel ››› .

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

● Tilt the rotary control until the desired di-rection is reached ››› Fig. 188 . A representa-tion of the tow vehicle and trailer set isshown on the instrument cluster screen forguidance purposes ››› Fig. 189 .● Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay atten-tion to your surroundings!● If necessary, correct the angle with the ro-tary control. Press the control towards theleft or right: the set will move to the left orright. Press the control backwards: the vehi-cle will follow the trailer.● Reverse and move forwards until the de-sired position is reached.● The manoeuvre ends when a message isdisplayed on the instrument cluster displayand, in some cases, an audio signal sounds.

Automatic brake operationThe trailer manoeuvre assistant helps thedriver by automatically operating the brakesin certain situations.

The driver is responsible for braking intime ››› .

The brakes may be applied automatically andthe function deactivated in the following sit-uations:

● A certain speed is exceeded.● The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehiclebrakes automatically until it stops.

266


● If the key is pressed during the manoeu-vre or the driver’s door opens.

WARNINGThe quickly turning steering wheel cancause serious injuries.● Do not hold the steering wheel during themanoeuvre until the system requests it.● Exception: If a dangerous situation oc-curs, intervene and take over the steering.

WARNINGNever allow the automatic operation ofbrakes to lead you to take any risk thatcompromises safety. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● The manoeuvre assist system is subject tocertain limitations inherent to the system.In certain situations, the automatic brakingintervention may only work in a limited wayor not work at all.● Always be ready to use the brakes your-self!● Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped.After this, brake the vehicle yourself.

NoteThe exterior mirrors cannot be adjustedwhile the assistant is active. The saved set-ting for the passenger’s mirror can be acti-vated ››› page 123 .


Camera with no visibility, fault message,the system disconnects● Clean the camera or remove possible ad-hesives or accessories from it ››› page 317 .● Check for visible damage.

The system behaves differently than ex-pectedThere can be several causes:● The camera is dirty ››› page 317 . In addi-tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can bereduced by detergent residue or any type ofcoating.● The system requirements must be met››› page 265.● The camera is covered with water.● The vehicle has some type of damage inthe camera area, e.g. due to a parking im-pact.● The field of view of the camera is blockedby an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system.● Changes have been made to the paint inthe camera area and structural modificationshave been made, e.g. to the front part of thevehicle and the running gear.

Solution for all cases● Temporarily disconnect the system.

● Check if one of the causes indicated abovehas occurred.● Once the source of the problem has beeneliminated, the system may be reconnected.● If the system still behaves unpredictably,have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Peripheral view system (TopView Camera)*

Introduction

Using 4 cameras, the system generates arepresentation that is shown on the infotain-ment system display. The cameras are loca-ted on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrorsand the rear lid.

The functions and representations of theArea View system may vary depending onwhether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNINGThe image from the cameras does notmake it possible to calculate the distance tothe obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) pre-cisely, so using them could cause seriousaccidents and injury.● The camera lenses augment and distortthe visual field and the objects on thescreen are seen differently and imprecisely. »

267

Driving

● Certain objects may not be shown or maynot be shown very clearly, for example,posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolu-tion or if light conditions are insufficient.● The cameras have blind spots in whichobstacles and people are not registered.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Top View Camera* system cannot over-come the limits imposed by the laws ofphysics and it only works within the limits ofthe system. The greater convenience provi-ded by the Area View system should nevertempt you to take any risk that may com-promise safety. If used negligently or invol-untarily, it may cause serious accidents andinjuries. The system is not a replacementfor driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● Monitor the area around the vehicle at alltimes, since the cameras do not capturesmall children, animals and certain objectsin all situations.● The system will probably be unable torepresent all areas clearly.

CAUTION● The camera images are only two-dimen-sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, ob-jects that jut out or holes on the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● In certain circumstances, the cameradoes not capture objects such as beams,fences, posts or thin trees, which coulddamage the vehicle.● The system displays the auxiliary linesand boxes regardless of the vehicle's envi-ronment, no objects are detected. Thedriver is responsible for determining thatthe vehicle will fit in the parking space.

Area View system

Fig. 190 Viewing the top view system: aerial view.

There are four different views to choosefrom:

Front camera areaRight camera areaRear camera areaLeft camera area

Function buttons Fig. 190:Exit the current display.

Adjust the display: bright, contrast andcolour.Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: con-necting and disconnecting the ParkPilotsound.

The aerial view is generated by combiningthe images from all the cameras ››› Fig. 190. The aerial view can be selectedby pressing the vehicle in the area.

Select the corresponding view by pressingthe different areas ››› Fig. 190 A to D of theaerial view or the reduced aerial view.

Conditions necessary for the use of theArea View system● The doors and the rear lid must be closed.● The image must be reliable and clear. Forthis reason, for example, the camera lensmust be clean.● The area around the vehicle must be clear-ly and totally visible.

A

B

C

D

268


● The area for parking or manoeuvringshould be a flat surface.● The vehicle should not be loaded veryheavily at the rear.● The driver must be used to the system.● There should be no damage to the vehiclein the camera area. If the position or installa-tion angle of the cameras have beenchanged, e.g. after a rear-end collision, thesystem should be checked by a specialisedworkshop.

Special characteristicsThe images on the area view system camerasare only two-dimensional. Due to a lack ofspatial depth, it is difficult or impossible tomake out on-screen any holes there may beon the ground, objects jutting out from theground or parts protruding from other vehi-cles.

Situations in which the objects or other vehi-cles appear to be further away or closer thanthey really are:

● On moving from a horizontal plane to aslope.● On moving from a slope to a horizontalplane.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.● If the vehicle approaches protruding ob-jects. These objects may be outside thecameras' angle of visibility.

Trailer modeThe Area View system conceals, in the rearcamera area, all the auxiliary guiding lineswhen the factory-fitted towing bracket isconnected electrically to a trailer››› page 273.

NoteTo become familiar with the system and itsfunctions, CUPRA recommends that youpractice handling the Area View system inan area where there is not too much trafficor in a car park.

Connecting and disconnecting

Fig. 191 Centre console: button for activating/de-activating the Area View system manually in com-bination with the parking aid system () or elsewith the rear ParkPilot system ().

Manual activation● Press button once ››› Fig. 191 .

The infotainment system screen displays theaerial view ››› Fig. 190 . If you press the button when driving at over 15 km/h (9mph), the image will not be displayed.

Automatic activation● Select reverse gear.● OR: The vehicle moves backwards.

The view of the image of the vehicle's rearcamera is shown in parallel parking modewith the reduced aerial view.

Manual disconnection● Press button again ››› Fig. 191 .● OR: press a button on the factory-equip-ped infotainment system, for example the button.● OR: press the function button.

Automatic off● Drive forwards at over 15 km/h (9 mph) ap-proximately.● OR: switch off the ignition. The Area Viewsystem menu disappears immediately.

269

Driving

Views of the peripheral vision system(modes)

Fig. 192 Display on the top view system screen: Front camera: off-road view. Rear camera: off-road view.

Depending on the equipment: con-necting and disconnecting the ParkPilotsound.Exiting the Area View system screen:

Adjust the display: bright, contrast andcolour.

The selected view is displayed on the rightside of the screen. The reduced aerial view

shown on the right side displays the viewframed in yellow. In addition, the right mar-gin of the screen displays the menu optionspossible and the views (the so-called“modes”) of the camera in question. The ac-tive view (mode) at the time is highlighted.

The red lines are indicate a distance of ap-prox. 40 cm away from the vehicle.

Aerial views (bird's eye view)Main mode:

The vehicle and its immediate vicinityseen from above are shown. Dependingon the equipment, the ParkPilot's pathmay also be displayed.

Three-dimensional views:The vehicle and its vicinity seen fromabove are shown.The vehicle and its vicinity seen fromabove are shown obliquely.

The vehicle and its vicinity seen obli-quely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display withyour finger in the direction of the arrows tochange the angle of vision in the three-di-mensional views of the vehicle and its vicini-ty.

Front camera views (front view)Cross traffic. This visualization helps tomonitor traffic to the left, front and rightof the vehicle and can be used, for ex-ample, when exiting garages or narrowexits.Angle parking. The area in front of thevehicle is shown. Orientation lines areshown to give guidance.Off-road. The area directly in front ofthe vehicle seen from above is shown.For example, on a slope, in order to seethe area directly in front of the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view)Right and left sides. The areas locateddirectly to the side of the vehicle seenfrom above are represented in order tonavigate possible obstacles more pre-cisely.

The driver’s or passenger's side seenfrom above is shown. This makes it

possible to visualize the blind spotsalong the vehicle.

Rear camera views (rear view)Angle parking. The area behind the ve-hicle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shownto give guidance.

270


Parallel parking. The area directly be-hind the vehicle is shown. The col-

oured boxes and auxiliary lines serve asorientation.Off-road or hitching a trailer function.The vehicle's rear is presented.Green and red semicircular auxiliarylines are displayed in vehicles with a fac-tory-fitted towing bracket. The auxiliarylines indicate the distance from the tow-ing bracket. The distance between theauxiliary lines (green and red) is approx.30 cm The orange auxiliary line indi-cates, according to how the steeringwheel is turned, the precalculated di-rection of the towed device.Cross traffic. This visualization helps tomonitor traffic to the left, front and rightof the vehicle and can be used, for ex-ample, when exiting garages or narrowexits.

Reverse Assist (Rear View Cam-era)*

Operating and safety warnings

WARNING● The reverse assist does not make it possi-ble to precisely calculate the distance from

obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-tem's own limits, hence its negligent usemay cause serious accidents and injuries ifused without due care. The driver shouldbe aware of his/her surroundings at alltimes to ensure safe driving.● The camera lens expands and distorts thefield of view and displays the objects on thescreen in a way that is different from reality.Distance perception is also distorted.● Due to the screen resolution or light con-ditions, some items may be blurry or notdisplayed at all. Take care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not beseen on the screen and could damage thevehicle.● The reverse assist has blind spots where itcannot see people or objects. Monitor thevehicle's surrounding area at all times.● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding areaat all times.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images are only two-dimensional.Protruding objects or holes in the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the guide lines ››› Fig. 193 . The width

represented by the lines decreases with ve-hicle load. Pay special attention to the sur-roundings when the inside of the vehicle ofthe luggage compartment are loaded.● In the following situations, objects orother vehicles appear to be further away orcloser than they actually are. Pay specialattention:– If moving from a flat surface to a slope

and vice-versa.– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orthat protrude from it. These objectsmay be outside the camera angle whenreversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if the driver is not familiarwith the system.● Reverse assist will not be available if therear lid is open.

Usage instructions

A camera installed in the rear lid handle as-sists the driver with reverse parking or ma-noeuvring ››› page 219 .

The camera image is viewed together withorientation lines projected on the »

271

Driving

Infotainment system screen. Part of thebumper can be seen at the bottom, whichcan be used by the driver as a referencepoint.

Rear assist settingsRear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place withoutswitching off the ignition or the infotainmentsystem.● Apply the parking brake.● Select reverse gear.● Press the function button displayed onthe screen.● Make the desired adjustments on themenu by pressing the –/+ function buttonsor by moving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assistThe system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, or if the lens is dirty.● If the area behind the vehicle is incom-plete.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded.

● If the position of the camera has changedafter a rear-end collision. Have the systemchecked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the systemTo familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, CUPRArecommends practising in a place withouttoo much traffic or in a car park when thereare good weather and visibility conditions.

Parking and manoeuvring with re-verse assist

Fig. 193 On the Infotainment system screen.:guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines ››› Fig. 193Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle(approximately in its total width) on theroad.

1

End of the side lines: approx. 2 m be-hind the vehicle on the road.Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behindthe vehicle on the road.Horizontal red line: a safe distance ofapprox. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicleon the road.

Switching the system on and off● Reverse assist is connected by a contactwhen engaging reverse gear.● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear and immediatelyafter removing the contact.● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys-tem ››› page 260 , the camera image will nolonger be displayed when reverse gear is dis-engaged, and the system will display the op-tical information provided by the parking aidsystem.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assistimage:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.● OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicleshown on the screen.

2

3

4

272

Towing bracket device*

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Parking manoeuvre● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-lect reverse gear.● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side lines lead towards the park-ing space.● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side lines run parallel to it.


Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspond-ing technical equipment. This additional loadhas an effect on the useful life, fuel con-sumption and vehicle performance and insome cases can reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more forcefrom the vehicle, and thus more concentra-tion from the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted onboth the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-ted on the coupling deviceThe maximum vertical load technically per-mitted from the trailer draw bar on the tow-ing bracket's tow ball is 88 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by CUPRA,the Start-Stop system operates as normal.No special characteristics need to be takeninto account.

If the system does not recognise the traileror the trailer bracket has not been retrofittedby CUPRA, the Start-Stop system must bedisconnected by pressing the correspondingbutton in the lower part of the centre con-sole before driving with the trailer, and itshould remain off for the rest of the jour-ney ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maxi-mum permitted trailer weight, you can thenclimb correspondingly steeper slopes. »

1) The RVC button will only be displayed whenreverse gear is engaged.

273

Driving

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-gine performance and the ability to climbslopes, the tow load decreases proportional-ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-bination must be reduced by 10% for every1000 m of altitude. When possible, operatethe trailer with the maximum authoriseddrawbar load on the ball joint of the towingbracket, but do not exceed the specifiedlimit.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hook when you are not using a trail-er.

● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle.

WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and in goodcondition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at morethan 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the corresponding

country, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-CUPRA workshop, the Start-Stopsystem must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a CUPRA workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 92. Otherwise, the tilt sensor couldcause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 213 .● CUPRA recommends that, if possible, thetow hook be removed or covered when it isnot going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the tow hook is fitted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, the

274


towing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-mounted with atowing device meet all the technical and le-gal requirements for driving with a trailer››› page 280.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by CUPRAfor this vehicle. Always check and take intoaccount the towing bracket manufacturer'sinstructions.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper orto the area where the bumper is mounted.The towing bracket should not impair thebumper's function. Do not make modifica-tions or repairs to the exhaust system or thebrake system. Make regular checks to ensurethat the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load onthe engine and cooling system. The coolingsystem should have sufficient coolant and beprepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cableAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 276 .

Trailer tail lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 276 .

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. To do so, CUPRA recommendsgoing to a specialised CUPRA dealer or anySEAT dealership.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehi-cle, additional mirrors will have to be instal-

led in accordance with the regulations of thecountry in question. The exterior mirrorsshould be adjusted before you start drivingand must provide a sufficient field of vision atthe rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumptionNever exceed the values indicated!

Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Cen-tral America

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

AustraliaBrake lights (total) 108 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts

Rear fog light 54 Watts

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could become »

275

Driving

detached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 194 Schematic representation: assignment ofthe pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the connection between the trail-er and the vehicle. With the engine running,electrical devices on the trailer receive pow-er from the electrical connection (pin 9 andpin 10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected, the consumers on the trailer willreceive electricity through this connection(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.

This powers, for example, the trailer's interiorlighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge ina caravan only receive electrical power if theengine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin3, pin 11 or pin 13.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow cableThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough sothat the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to en-sure they are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations.Make sure that the maximum permissiblepower that can be absorbed by the trailer isnot exceeded ››› page 275 .

Include in the anti-theft alarmThe trailer is included in the anti-theft sys-tem if the following conditions are met:

276


● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer powersocket.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, thetilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entire

vehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries.● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or fail-ure of the lighting system, and consequent-ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the pins of the trailerpower socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as inthe anti-theft alarm system, have them in-spected by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery willdischarge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle cantow.››› The vertical load on the coupling isexerted vertically from above on the hook ofthe towing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model,which may be lower than these figures, are »

277

Driving

given in the vehicle documentation. The in-formation in the vehicle documentationtakes precedence at all times.

To promote safety while driving, CUPRA rec-ommends making the most of the maximumvertical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 273 . An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. CUPRA recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-

imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 304 .

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight,the maximum load technically permissibleon the coupling point, the maximum au-thorised vehicle weight or the gross combi-nation weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer are exceeded, accidents and seriousinjuries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum

permissible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the sta-bility and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and in goodcondition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range adjuster ››› page 118 1).

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LEDxenon headlights.

278


Specific features of driving with a trailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight ofthe towing vehicle and trailer, the brakingdistance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (in tiptronic automatic gearbox mode)to take advantage of the braking power pro-vided by the engine. Otherwise, the brakingsystem could overheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the grosscombination weight of the towing vehicleand trailer, change the centre of gravity andthe properties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the trail-er is loaded, then the load distribution is in-correct. Under these conditions, drive slowlyand with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicleand trailer, the vehicle might start rollingbackwards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the follow-ing:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.

● Press the button once to disconnect theelectronic parking brake ››› page 246 .● Move the selector lever to the D/S››› page 202position.● Pull out the button and hold it in thatposition to immobilise the towing vehicle andtrailer with the electronic parking brake.● Release the brake pedal.● Start driving slowly.● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle and se-rious injury.● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the vehi-cle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.

● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.● Take into account the speed limit for ve-hicles with a trailer, as it could be lowerthan for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle andtrailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailercombination is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation systemdetects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-tion on the steering control to reduce theweaving of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-tion requirements● The vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket or has been retro-fitted witha compatible towing bracket.● The ESC and the ASR are switched on. Thecontrol lamp or is not lit up on the in-strument cluster.● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-cle through the trailer power socket.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph). »

279

Driving

● The maximum vertical load technicallypermissible is not being exceeded on thecoupling device.● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equip-ped with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced safety provided by the elec-tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-er should not lead you to take any risks thatcould compromise your safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the vehicleand trailer may not correctly detect all driv-ing conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light trailers, so it may not stabilisethese correctly.

● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,the trailer can even interfere with the sta-bility system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over without having previously weaved.● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.installation of a bicycle rack with lights), re-peated automatic braking may occur in ex-treme driving conditions.

Electrically unlocking trailerhook*

Description

Fig. 195 On the right side of the luggage com-partment: button for unlocking the tow hook.

The towing bracket’s hook is located in thebumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlockingcannot be removed.

There should be no person, animal or objectin the path of the tow hook ››› .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it● Stop the vehicle and connect the electron-ic parking brake ››› page 246 .● Switch off the engine.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the ››› Fig. 195 button briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically and automaticallyturns outwards. The button's control lampflashes.● Finish remove the tow hook by hand untilyou feel and hear that it has engaged and thecontrol lamp on the button stays on.● Close the rear lid.● Hitching and connecting a trailer››› page 276.

Retracting the tow hook● Stop the vehicle and apply the electronicparking brake.● Switch off the engine.● Unhook the trailer and interrupt the elec-trical connection between it and the vehicle.If you are using an adapter, remove it fromthe trailer's power socket.

280


● Open the rear lid.● Pull the ››› Fig. 195 button briefly. The towhook unlocks electrically.● Turn the tow hook under the bumper withyour hand until you feel and hear that it en-gages and the control lamp on the button re-mains on continuously.● Close the rear lid.

The control lamp ● If the warning light on the button››› Fig. 195 flashes, this means that thetow hook has not been attached properly oris damaged.››› ● If the warning lamp ››› Fig. 195 remainson with the rear lid open, the tow hook iscorrectly in place both when extracted andwhen covered.

The control light of the lamp switches off ap-proximately 1 minute after closing the readlid.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket may causeinjury and accidents.● Only use the tow hook if it is properly en-gaged.● Always ensure that no person, animal orobject is to be found in the path of the towhook.

● Never use a tool or instrument while thetow hook is moving.● Never press the ››› Fig. 195 button whenthere is a trailer hooked to the vehicle orwhen a carrier system or other accessoriesare mounted on the tow hook.● If the tow hook is not attached properly,do not use it. Instead, go to a specialisedworkshop and have the towing bracketchecked.● If you detect any fault in the electricalsystem or in the towing bracket, contact aspecialised workshop and ask them tocheck it.● If the ball has a diameter of less than 49mm at any one point, do not use the towingbracket under any circumstances.

CAUTIONIf you clean the vehicle with high-pressureor steam devices, do not point the jet di-rectly towards the retractable tow hook orthe trailer power socket, as this may dam-age the joints or remove the grease neces-sary for lubrication.

NoteAt extremely low temperatures, the towhook may be impossible to operate. In thiscase, place the vehicle in a warmer location(for example, a garage).

Fitting a bicycle carrier on the retract-able towbar

The maximum allowed weight of the carriersystem, including the load, is 75 kg. The car-rier system should not protrude more than700 mm backwards from the spherical head.Only carrier systems on which up to 3 bikescan be mounted are allowed. Heavier bicy-cles must be mounted as close to the vehicleas possible (tow hook).

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the tow hitch with a bi-cycle rack mounted on the tow hook cancause accidents and injury.● Never exceed the maximum weight orthe limits indicated above.● The bicycle rack may not be mounted tothe neck of the hook below the ball be-cause, due to the shape of the neck anddepending on the rack model, the rackcould be incorrectly mounted on the vehi-cle.● Always read and take the manufacturerassembly instructions into account.

CAUTIONIf the maximum weight and limits indicatedabove are exceeded, the vehicle may sufferconsiderable damage.● Never exceed the values indicated! »

281

Driving

NoteCUPRA recommends removing, as far aspossible, all removable parts of the bicyclesbefore setting off. These parts include, forexample, baskets and saddlebags, childseats or batteries. This improves aerody-namics and the centre of gravity of the racksystem.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 196 Limits and attachment points for retrofit-ting a towing bracket.

CUPRA recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermalprotection plates. To do so, CUPRA recom-mends going to a specialised CUPRA dealeror any SEAT dealership.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ballhead and the road ››› Fig. 196 D must neverbe less than indicated. This also applieswhen the vehicle is fully loaded, includingthe technically permissible maximum verticalload on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 196 :Mounting points on the vehicle950.5 mm65 mm min.350-420 mm220 mm633.5 mm1,043 mm

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctions inthe entire vehicle electronic system, as wellas to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the taillights or any other unsuitable power

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

282


sources. Only use suitable connectors toconnect the trailer.● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note● Only use towing brackets that have beenapproved by CUPRA for the model in ques-tion.● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-tional towing hook solution is not recom-mended. Please consult your TechnicalService.

283

Practical tips

Practical tips

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 197 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 197 .

● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon asthe pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off thefuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel af-ter the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the ex-pansion chamber in the fuel tank.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the rightas far as it will go.● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 285.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 327 .

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine andturn off the ignition for safety reasons.● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canisterin the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle.In an accident the canister could be dam-aged and could leak.

● If, in exceptional circumstances, you haveto carry a spare fuel canister, please ob-serve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.This could cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident!

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. Thecatalytic converter can be damaged.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched onfor at least 30 seconds before starting theengine. When you then start the engine itmay take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start firing.

284


For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from specialisedpersonnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 198 Identification of fuels according to Euro-pean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols onthe pump and on your vehicle's tank flap.The identification serves to prevent confu-sion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”

1

2

means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol

The correct grade of petrol is listed insidethe fuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, usenormal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case »

3

1) Depending on country2) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

285

Practical tips

only use moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher thanthe one required by the engine can beused.

● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

Engine management and emis-sions control system

Introduction

WARNING● Due to the high temperatures reached bythe exhaust gas scrubbing system, youshould not park your vehicle near a surfacethat can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci-alised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest speci-alised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 287 .

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a spe-cialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (ElectronicPower Control) lights up and should go off once theengine has started.

NoteWhile the indicator lamps , or areon, there might be faults in the engine, fuelconsumption may go up and the enginemight lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines.● Never run the fuel tank dry.

286


● When changing or adding engine oil, donot exceed the necessary amount››› page 292, Topping up the engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 50 .

If you should notice misfiring, uneven run-ning or loss of power when the car is moving,have the vehicle inspected by a specialisedworkshop. In general, the emissions warninglamp will light up when any of these symp-toms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuelcan enter the exhaust system and escape in-to the atmosphere. The catalytic convertercan also be damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig-nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to en-ter the exhaust system, which could causeoverheating and damage the catalytic con-verter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the gases on occasions. Thisdepends on the sulphur content of the fuelused. This can quite often be avoided bychanging to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Undernormal driving conditions the filter cleans it-self. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. ifshort journeys are made continuously), it be-comes blocked with soot and the followingindication is displayed to the driver: Par-ticulate filter: cleaned while thevehicle is moving. See Manual. Theparticulate filter needs cleaning (regenera-tion).

Regeneration of the particulate filterRequirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› ● Completely remove your foot from the ac-celerator pedal for a few seconds to let thevehicle roll with the gear engaged.● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and letroll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par-ticulate filter cleaning process and may takesome time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-mediately to a specialised workshop to repairthe fault.

WARNINGAlways adjust your speed to suit the weath-er conditions, roads, braking distance andtraffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-eration phase. Route recommendationsshould never make you disregard eachcountry's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION● Due to the high temperatures caused bythe regeneration of the particulate filter, itis possible that the radiator fan will activateafter stopping the engine, even it its oper-ating temperature has not been reached.● Noise, smells and high idle speeds canoccur during regeneration.● Always use the correct engine oil and thecorrect fuel to make sure the useful life ofthe particulate filter is not affected. Alsoavoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compartment

Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). »

287

Practical tips

Always observe the warnings listed belowand follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-tentially hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGWhen work is done in the engine compart-ment, injuries, burns, accidents and evenfires can occur.● Turn off the engine, disconnect the igni-tion e and apply the electronic parkingbrake. Place the selector lever in P. Let theengine cool.● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Wait until no steamor coolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.● Keep children away from the engine com-partment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the pointswhere the jump leads are attached››› page 50. The battery could explode.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

● Never cover the engine with additionalinsulating materials such as a blanket. Riskof fire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by coveringthe cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient forsecuring the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine run-ning, there is an additional, potentially fa-tal, safety risk from the rotating parts, suchas the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan,etc., and from the high-voltage ignition sys-tem. You should also observe the following:– Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even ifthe handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment● Inspect the ground underneath your ve-hicle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-vironment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in a spe-cialised workshop.

288


NoteIn right-hand drive vehicles* some brakefluid reservoirs are on the other side of theengine compartment ››› Fig. 201 .

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 199 Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 200 Cam under the bonnet

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 199 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 200 2 .The arrester hook under the bonnet is re-leased.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGMake sure that the bonnet is properlyclosed. If it opens when driving, it can causean accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

289

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 201 Diagram for the location of the various ele-ments.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank ››› page 293Windscreen washer reservoir››› page 296Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 292Engine oil filler cap ››› page 292Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 295Vehicle battery (underneath a cover)››› page 297

1

2

3

4

5

6

NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be doneby a technical service or specialised work-shop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correctengine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change:

290


Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

CUPRA recommends using original SEAT oilto guarantee high performance of CUPRAengines.

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused bythese additives is not covered by the warran-ty.

CAUTIONTake the following into account if you haverefilled with an engine oil different to thosespecified in the aforementioned standards,or by your SEAT technical service centre:● There is no way of completely avoidingthe danger of causing damage to the en-gine and particulate filter*.● You can continue driving with the vehicleif the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engineoil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon aspossible and request an oil change. Other-wise, there is a danger of engine damage.● If you have topped up more than 0.5 l ofengine oil, drive with the engine at low loadlevels and within the medium RPM range asa maximum. Do not drive at more than 80

– km/h and do not travel more than 300 km(approximately). Go to a specialised work-shop as soon as possible and request an oilchange. Otherwise, there is a danger of en-gine damage.● You are responsible for the risk of possi-ble damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaustsystem). If in doubt, do not start the engineand request assistance from the technicalservice centre.● Do not start the engine if you have top-ped up with a fluid other than engine oil.Request assistance from the technical serv-ice centre. Danger of engine damage!

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way,the correct engine oil will always be availa-ble for a top-up if needed.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine oil pressure too low.Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accompa-nied by three audible warnings, switch off the engineand check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil››› page 292.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level iscorrect, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance.

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity to doso ››› page 292 .

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Untilthen it is advisable to check the oil level every time yourefuel.


291

Practical tips

Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 202 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed untilthe operating temperature is reached andthen stop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check theoil level ››› Fig. 202 . Top up with engine oilif necessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, pref-erably when filling the tank and before ajourney.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 287.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Contacta Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 203 In the engine compartment: Engine oilfiller cap.

Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› in Working in theengine compartment on page 288.

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 203.● Carefully add oil in small quantities (nomore than 0.5 l).● To avoid adding too much oil, wheneveryou add a certain amount, wait about 2 mi-nutes and recheck the oil level ››› page 292 .● If necessary, add some more oil.● When the oil level reaches at least zone››› Fig. 202 B , unscrew the engine oil fillercap carefully ››› .

292


The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartmentillustration ››› page 290 .

Engine oil specification ››› page 290 .

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine com-ponents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 202 A ,do not start the engine. This could result indamage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 202 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn inthrough the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way,the correct engine oil will always be availa-ble for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 287 .● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such additiveswould not be covered by the factory war-ranty.

For the sake of the environment● We recommend that you change the en-gine oil and the filter at a technical servicecentre.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough tohold all the engine oil.

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freezeprotection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may be »

293

Practical tips

increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwiseantifreeze protection will diminish and thiswill worsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mix-ture of distilled water and at least 40 % ofthe additive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail leadingto serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has been

mixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 204 In the engine compartment: marking oncoolant expansion tank.

Fig. 205 Engine compartment: coolant expansiontank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 290 .

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks››› Fig. 204. When the engine is hot, it maybe slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down.

294


– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professio-nal assistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expan-sion tank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level be-comes stable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehiclespecialised workshop to have the coolingsystem examined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the car in a safe place and do notcontinue driving. Obtain technical assis-tance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 206 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser-voir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 290 .

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops belowthe mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display moni-tors the brake fluid level ››› page 81 .

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment.

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake system.These bubbles can significantly reducebraking power, notably increasing brakingdistance, and could result in the total fail-ure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard. »

295

Practical tips

● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid at a specialised CUPRA service or at aSEAT Official Service. If none is available,use only high-quality brake fluid that meetsDIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USAStandards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the windowwasher tank and refilling it

Fig. 207 In the engine compartment: windowwasher tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the enginecompartment ››› page 290 .

Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washercontains the cleaning fluid for the wind-screen, the rear window and the headlightwasher system*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 287 .● The window washer tank is marked withthe symbol on the cap.

● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mix-ture, up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concen-trate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 pro-portion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 327 .

CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, itmay freeze on the windscreen and rearwindow, reducing forward and rear visibili-ty.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you have

296


warmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by CUPRA.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recom-mended by CUPRA with other products.This could lead to flocculation and mayblock the windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-duces visibility through the windscreen,and leads to loss of visibility in headlights inmodels with headlight washer.

12-volt battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine com-partment and is almost maintenance-free.It is checked as part of the Inspection Serv-ice. Nevertheless, check the terminals areclean and have the correct tightening tor-que, especially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a specialised CU-PRA Service, SEAT Official Service or a work-shop specialising in batteries: risk of burns orexploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from thebattery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are pro-hibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Always follow the instruction manual.

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare lost. These functions will require reset-ting after the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positive ca-ble.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periodsThe vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 300 .Some functions, such as the interior lights,or the remote door opening, may be tempo-rarily disabled to prevent the battery fromrunning flat. These functions will come backon as soon as the ignition is switched on andthe engine started.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the batteryshould be charged ››› »

297

Practical tips

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injury andchemical burns as well as the risk of acci-dent or fire when working on the batteryand the electrical system:● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes on theskin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solution,and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid isswallowed by mistake, consult a doctor im-mediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and batter-ies.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.

When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnectthe battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices before re-connecting the battery. Reconnect first thepositive cable and then the negative cable.Never reverse the polarity of the connec-tions. This could cause an electrical fire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flat bat-tery can also freeze at temperatures closeto 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.

● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It should go out when the en-gine has started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

298


Checking the battery electrolyte level

Fig. 208 Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt bat-tery (schematic representation).

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

● Open the bonnet and then lift the coverthat protects the front part of the battery››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 288.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment dia-gram ››› page 290 .

The “magic eye” indicator, located on thetop of the battery changes colour, depend-

ing on the charge state and electrolyte levelof the battery.

There are two different colours:The battery's electro-

lyte level is too low. Go to a specialisedworkshop to have the battery checkedand replaced if necessary.

The battery’s electrolyte level is cor-rect.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the bat-tery should be checked by a specialisedworkshop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled envi-ronment.

Yellow or colourless:

Black:

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility,the size and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. CU-PRA recommends you have the battery re-placed by a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 200 ) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 300 .The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used isof the same make and type as the original fit-ted battery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded tothe power management mode at a special-ised workshop. »

299

Practical tips

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free batter-ies that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in General information on page 298.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedisposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting capacity

The power management controls the distri-bution of electrical energy and thus helps toensure that there is always enough poweravailable to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases there

may not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life ofthe battery.

The main functions incorporated in the pow-er management system are battery diagno-sis, residual current management and dy-namic power management.

Battery diagnosisThe battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sen-sors detect the battery voltage, battery cur-rent and battery temperature. This enablesthe system to calculate the current powerlevel and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current managementThe residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the batterydiagnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the battery

from losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power managementWhile the vehicle is moving, this functiondistributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alter-nator can supply, and thus maintains themaximum possible battery power level.

Note● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and use-ful life of the battery are limited.● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure or lowbattery charge level warning lamp will beshown ››› page 81 .

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. In theseconditions a large amount of power is con-sumed, but only a small amount is supplied.The situation is also critical if electrical devi-ces are in use when the engine is not

300

Wheels

running. In this case power is consumedwhen none is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-odsIf you do not drive your vehicle for a periodof several days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount ofcurrent they are using. This limits theamount of power consumed and helps toensure reliable starting even after a long pe-riod. Some convenience functions, such asremote vehicle opening, may not be availa-ble under certain circumstances. Thesefunctions will be restored when you switchon the ignition and start the engine.

With the engine switched offFor example, if you listen to the sound sys-tem with the engine switched off the batterywill run down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is runningAlthough the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven.This can occur when a lot of power is beingconsumed but only a small amount supplied,especially if the battery is not fully chargedinitially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off theelectrical devices that are using a lot of pow-er, or reduce the current they are consum-ing. Heating systems in particular use a largeamount of electrical power. If you notice, forinstance, that the seat heating* or the rearwindow heater is not working, they may havebeen temporarily switched off or regulatedto a lower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electricalpower is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power re-quirement and charge the battery at thesame time.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace. »

301

Practical tips

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate morequickly than standard tyres, for instance dueto strong knocks, potholes, manhole coversand kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very im-portant ››› page 304 .

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it isnecessary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate morequickly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 42 . Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. To do so, CUPRA recommends goingto a specialised CUPRA dealer or any SEATdealership.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyretread wraps around the foreign body andprovisionally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates thedirection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This makes surethat optimal use is made of tyre properties interms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noiseand wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you con-sult with a specialised CUPRA Service orSEAT Official Service centre for advice re-garding current technical recommendations.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 270 km/h (168 mph)max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum gripduring the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. This maycause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres.

PQRSTUHVZWY

302

Wheels

● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special toolsand the corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. Ifyou have installed new tyres, drive the first500 km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform yourspecialised workshop before purchasingthem ››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country ofresidence.

If the type of spare wheel is different formthe normal wheels — e.g. in the case of win-ter tyres or particularly wide tyres — thespare wheel should only be used temporarilyin the event of a puncture, and the vehicleshould be driven with care. Refit the normalroad wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4wheels must be fitted with tyres of the samebrand, type and tread so that the tractionsystem is not damaged by a difference in thenumber of turns of the wheels. Therefore, inthe event of a puncture, only a spare wheelwith the same perimeter as normal tyresshould be used.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved byCUPRA. Otherwise the vehicle may bedamaged, causing an accident.

● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. When se-lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en-tirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damage thetyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endan-ger road safety. Risk of accident!● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!● Models with aerodynamic wheel rimsand/or with bolt-on plastic elements (moreclosed design) increase the likelihood of iceand snow accumulating on the inside. Thisshould be taken into account, dependingon the driving situations, as snow or ice ac-cumulated in the wheels can cause vibra-tion in the vehicle when it drives at over 40 »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.303

Practical tips

km/h. It is advisable to remove ice andsnow from the inside of the wheels usinghot water.● If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, thelikelihood of stones becoming trapped in-side wheel rims with plastic elements in-creases when driving at high speed or in asporty manner. If you see that there arestones trapped between the aluminiumwheel rim and the insert, you can attemptto remove them using pressurised water.

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A CUPRA Service Centre should be con-sulted to find out whether wheels or tyresof different sizes to those originally fittedby CUPRA can be fitted, and to find outabout the combinations allowed betweenthe front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle(axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.● When 245/40 R19 or 245/35 R20 tyresare fitted, the corresponding deflectormust also be installed.

Tyre life

Fig. 209 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 209 .

● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure››› page 308.● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left doorframe ››› Fig. 209 .

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and ad-versely affects vehicle performance and ride.Correct inflation pressures are very impor-tant, especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ››› Fig. 209 ).When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuelconsumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 209.

Do not forget the spare wheel when check-ing the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheelinflated to the highest pressure required forthe road wheels.

304

Wheels

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure la-bel ››› Fig. 209 .

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear,you should check wheel alignment at a spe-cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT OfficialService.

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels and tyresmay lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, totread separation or even to a blow-out.● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflatedto the right pressure. The recommendedtyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 209.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressureshould be that indicated on the label››› Fig. 209.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type of tyrefitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 210 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 211 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 210 . The letters"TWI" or triangles on the sidewall of the tyremark the position of the wear indicators. »

305

Practical tips

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundTo ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 211. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible and beapproximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of waterand when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.

● The speed has to be adapted accordingly,otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel nuts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel nuts* ››› page 45 .

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel nuts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nutsis too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the

tightening torque is too high, the wheelnuts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 47 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longereffective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pres-sures listed on the rear of the front leftdoor frame ››› page 304 .

In winter road conditions winter tyres willconsiderably improve vehicle handling. The

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

306

Wheels

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehi-cles equipped with wide section tyres orwith high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Yon the sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's docu-ments (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity orCOC1)). The vehicle documentation variesdepending on the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 302 .

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitablestickers are available at specialised CUPRAServices, SEAT Official Service centres andspecialised workshops. Please note the reg-ulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissiblespeed for your vehicle may be significantlylower. The maximum speed limit for thesetyres depends directly on the maximum axleweights for your car and on the listed weightrating of the tyres being used.

It is best to contact a specialised CUPRAService or SEAT Official Service to check themaximum speed which is permissible for theV-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basisof this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Fuel consumption, wear and noiseswhile driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the frontwheels, even on vehicles with four-wheeldrive.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having mounted the chains, it is best todisable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 250, Connecting and disconnect-ing the ESC.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

Tyres Wheel rim Chains

225/50 R18 7Jx18 VAS 45Max. link 9 mm

225/45 R19 8Jx19 VAS 45

Other dimensions do not allow chains »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.307

Practical tips

Remove any central wheel trims before fit-ting snow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive on roadswithout snow. Otherwise they will impairvehicle handling, damage the tyres andwear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contactwith them. CUPRA recommends the use ofcoated snow chains.

Tyre pressure monitor system

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is muchlower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre hasstructural damage.In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text mes-sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon aspossible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace anydamaged tyres.

Flashes

System faultThe control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minuteand then lights up permanently.If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition offand on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitorindicator ››› page 309 . If the fault continues, go to aspecialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre monitor system

Fig. 212 Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyrepressure.

The tyre pressure monitoring system com-pares the individual speeds of each wheeland thus the dynamic radius with the help ofthe ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator will indicate this on the in-strument panel through a warning lamp anda warning to the driver››› Fig. 212 . When onlyone specific tyre is affected, its position with-in the vehicle will be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread changeThe wheel diameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is changed manually.308

Wheels

● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre pressure monitoring indicator or itmay not indicate anything under certain cir-cumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-cov-ered or unpaved roads, or when driving withsnow chains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring in-dicatorAfter changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni-toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do thesame, for example, when the front and rearwheels are swapped.

● Switch the ignition on.● Save the new inflation pressure in the Info-tainment system: function button > SET-TINGS > Tyres ››› page 88 .

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and the

wheels fitted. After a long journey with variedspeeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before calibra-tion ››› Fig. 209 .

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre pressure monitoring system canonly operate correctly if all of the tyres areinflated to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyrechecked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.

● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-ted with the ignition on, an audible warningwill sound. In the event that there is a faultin the system, an audible warning willsound.● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempo-rarily deactivate the TPMS. The controllamp shows a fault, but disappears whenroad conditions or the driving style change.● Do not only rely on the tyre pressuremonitoring system. Regularly check yourtyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is cor-rect and that the tyres are not damageddue to puncture, cuts, tears and im-pacts/dents. Remove objects from thetyres only when they have not pierced thetyres.● The tyre pressure monitoring indicatordoes not function when there is a fault inthe ESC or ABS ››› page 249 .

309

Practical tips

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 213 In the luggage compartment: load floorraised.

Fig. 214 In the luggage compartment: remove thesubwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyre checked and replaced as soonas possible at a specialised CUPRA Service,SEAT Official Service or at a specialisedworkshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for aspare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel● Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› page 134 .● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise››› Fig. 213.

● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-woofer)*To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Lift and secure the luggage compartmentfloor as described in ››› page 134 .● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 214 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 214 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.● When re-mounting the spare tyre, placethe subwoofer on the base of the wheel rimwith care. When doing so, the tip of the“FRONT” arrow on the subwoofer shouldpoint forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmlyrotate the securing wheel clockwise so thatthe subwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the

310

Wheels

rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rearwheel that you have removed and replacethe punctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an accident.The tyre pressure is listed on the back ofthe left front door frame ››› Fig. 209 .● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically switchoff during the journey. Switch off the sys-tem when starting off.

311

Maintenance

Maintenance

Service

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Mainte-nance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)Specialised CUPRA dealers, SEAT dealer-ships or a specialised workshop recordsService receipts in a central system. Thanksto this comprehensive documentation of theservice history, it is possible to reproduce theservices performed any time. CUPRA recom-mends requesting a Service receipt after ev-ery service carried out containing all theservices carried out on the system.

Whenever there is a new service the receiptis replaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa-ble in some markets. In this case, your spe-cialised CUPRA dealer or a SEAT dealer-ship will inform you about the current doc-umentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your special-ised CUPRA dealer, SEAT dealership or aspecialised workshop will document the fol-lowing information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sug-gested, e.g. changing the brake pads in thenear future.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information isdocumented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe inju-ries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carried outby a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEATdealership or a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age to the vehicle due to insufficient workor of lack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with CU-PRA guidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service Inter-vals

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service..

312

Service

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate when

you have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about thespecifications of the engine oil according tothe VW standard ››› page 290 .

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However, afixed service may affect service costs TheService Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval displayAt CUPRA, the dates of the services are indi-cated by the service interval display on theinstrument cluster ››› page 78 or in the Vehi-cle settings menu of the infotainment sys-tem››› page 84››› page 88 .

The service interval display gives informationfor service dates that involve an engine oilchange or an inspection. When the time forthe corresponding service comes, additionalwork required, such as the change of brakefluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is underadverse conditions of use, some of thework must be carried out before the nextservice period or even between service in-tervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur con-tent.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about the »

313

Maintenance

need of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Make sure that any repairs are carried outby a specialised CUPRA dealer, a SEATdealership or a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONCUPRA cannot be held liable for any dam-age to the vehicle due to insufficient workor of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (dependingon the conditions of use and the featuresof the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox,or operating fluids). Maintenance servicesare divided into inspection and review serv-ices. Consult the details of the jobs requiredfor your vehicle at:

● Your CUPRA dealer

● Your SEAT dealership● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your specialised CUPRA dealer,any SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop always receives updated informationabout any modifications that are made.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the man-ufacturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. Forthis reason, we always recommend the useof Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additional

service to you, offering the possibility of re-placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use CUPRA Origi-nal Accessories and CUPRA approved acces-sories for your vehicle. The reliability, safetyand suitability of these accessories havebeen inspected specifically for this type ofvehicle. CUPRA cannot be held liable for thesafety and suitability of parts from othermanufacturers.

Mobility Service (Service Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your CU-PRA vehicle you will be able to enjoy thebenefits and coverage of the CUPRA MobilityService.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new CUPRA vehicle is automaticallycovered by the CUPRA Mobility Service with-out additional costs.

314

Vehicle maintenance

If you wish to enjoy this service after this pe-riod, you can extend the Mobility Service aslong as you carry out the recommended In-spection and Maintenance Services at a spe-cialised CUPRA Service or SEAT OfficialService.

If your CUPRA vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the Mobility Servicediffers depending on the country where thevehicle was purchased. For further informa-tion, ask your specialised CUPRA dealer, anySEAT dealership or visit the CUPRA websitein your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

Specialised CUPRA Services or SEAT OfficialServices ensure the perfect condition of newvehicles. Check the purchase agreement orcomplementary additional documentationprovided by your Technical Service to seethe conditions and the terms of the warran-ty. Consult further information in this regardin your specialised CUPRA Service or SEATOfficial Service.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safe place,out of the reach of children. Danger of poi-soning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, treeresin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehi-cle, the more damage it can cause to thesurface. High temperatures, for instancestrong sunlight, further intensify the dam-age.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects,bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of waterand a microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washedafter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure andthe distance between the spraying water. Donot aim the jet directly to the side windowgaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner. »

315

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the wind-screen wipers are deactivated. Bear in mindthe instructions of the car wash tunnel oper-ator, especially if your vehicle has detacha-ble parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possi-ble.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft micro-fibre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to retractthe exterior mirrors to prevent them frombeing damaged. Electric exterior rearview

mirrors must always be folded/deployedelectrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checkedin the following tables. The contents shouldbe understood merely as a recommenda-tion. Go to your specialised workshop if you

316

Vehicle maintenance

have special questions or parts that are notlisted. Take he general considerations intoaccount ››› in Take special care with... onpage 320.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximumin 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray withno solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaning prod-uct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a steelcleaning product is required


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour code inan authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and then ap-ply hard wax. Go you your speci-alised workshop if you have anyqueries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised workshoptake care of this

The water does notcreate droplets onthe clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative afterwardsif the wax used does not containpreservative ingredients

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, bird drop-pings, tree sap,road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g.cosmetic productsor sunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as paintedparts ››› page 315 »

317

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if possi-ble solvent-free plastic cleaner


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), allowedto dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt,e.g. oil, make-up,etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved grease andpaint particles drying with an ab-sorbent cloth, in case you musttreat it with water afterwards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with anabsorbent cloth, if applicable,apply neutral soap solution af-terwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-based dirt,e.g. oil, make-up,etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand suitable stain remover forleatherDry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leath-er

318

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only.To avoid scratches, the scraper should onlybe pushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damagingthe paint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Riskof scratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to cleanthem.● Seat belts and their components mustnever be cleaned with chemical products,nor should they be allowed to come intocontact with corrosive liquids, solvents orsharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question. »

319

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantarawith leather cleaning products, solvents, waxpolish, shoe cream, stain removers or similarproducts.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoecream, spot removers or similar products onleather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlightfor long periods, otherwise it may tend to

lose some of its colour. If the car is left for aprolonged period in the bright sun, it is bestto cover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditions suchas humid weather, darkness or when thesun is in its lowest point, visibility may beimpacted. Risk of accident! Such coatingscan also cause the windscreen wiper bladesto make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 297 .

Accessories and modifica-tions to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a highstandard of active and passive safety. For thisreason, we recommend that you ask a speci-alised CUPRA Service or SEAT Official Serv-ice for advice before fitting accessories orreplacement parts. Your Official Service hasthe latest information from the manufacturerand can recommend accessories and re-placement parts which are suitable for yourrequirements. They can also answer anyquestions you might have regarding officialregulations.

We recommend you to use only CUPRA ac-cessories and Genuine CUPRA parts®. Spe-cialised CUPRA Services or SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

320

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out ac-cording to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electron-ic components, software, wiring or datatransfer in the vehicle may cause malfunc-tioning. Due to the way the electronic com-ponents are linked together in networks,other indirect systems may be affected by

the faults. This can seriously impair safety,lead to excessive wear of components, andalso invalidate your vehicle registrationdocuments.

You will appreciate that your specialised CU-PRA dealer or SEAT dealership cannot beheld liable for any damage caused by modifi-cations and/or work performed incorrectlyin the vehicle.

We therefore recommend that all workshould be performed by a specialised CUPRAService or a SEAT Official Service using gen-uine CUPRA® parts.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. CUPRAgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters pro-vided that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.

● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A specialised CUPRA Service, SEAT OfficialService or specialised workshop will be ableto inform you about options for installing andoperating radio transmitters with a highertransmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment in-side the vehicle without a properly installedexternal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, »

321

Maintenance

provided the equipment cannot interferewith the driver's immediate control of the ve-hicle and that any such equipment carriesthe mark. Any retrofit equipment thatcould influence the driver's control of thevehicle must have a type approval for yourvehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle with-out a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields that couldcause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

322

Information for the user



Information stored by the con-trol units

Storage of accident data (Event DataRecorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. Thesedata are used to support the analysis of howdifferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupantswere wearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as wheth-er the systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist).● Park Pilot system● Parking aid system (Park Assist).● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident in-vestigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) the

vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

CUPRA will not have access to EDR data un-less the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, thelessee or hirer) gives their consent. Theremay be exceptions to this, depending on le-gal or contractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, CUPRA may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manu-facture of your new CUPRA.

Constructive measures to encourage recy-cling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials. »

323


● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includ-ing odour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during ve-hicle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electronicdevices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehiclemust be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declaration

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de-vices. The manufacturers of these devicesdeclare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declara-tion is available online at the following ad-dress:

www.cupraofficial.com

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of com-ponents that, due to their size or nature,cannot include a sticker are listed below, aslong as it is legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fitted inthe vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt, GERMANY

Radio frequency remotecontrol (auxiliary heat-er) Digades GmbH

Äußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANYTransmitted-Receiver

(independent heating)

Radar sensors for assis-tance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg, GERMANY

324


Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All CUPRA models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mW Formentor

Transmitted-Receiver (independent heating) 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW Formentor

Bluetooth 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Leon, Formentor

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915MHz 21 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm All CUPRA models

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW All CUPRA models »

325


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon, Formentor

35.0 dBm Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Ateca

Wireless charging110-120 kHz 10 W Ateca

111-120 kHz 10 W Leon, Formentor

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All CUPRA models

Online Connectivity Unit

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

All CUPRA models

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm



E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm



a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional require-ments.

Hereby, Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH de-clares that the radio equipment type LTE-MBC-EU2 is in compliance with Directive2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declara-

tion of conformity is available at the followinginternet address:

http://www.molex.com/doc326

http://www.molex.com/doc

Indications about the technical data

Technical data

Indications about the tech-nical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the dieselcombustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle ID numberThe vehicle ID number can be found in thefollowing places:

● In the infotainment system using the but-ton > SETTINGS > Service > VehicleID number.● One the vehicle's data label.● In front, under the windscreen.● To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’sright hand door frame. Vehicles for certainexport countries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or super-vised by certified EU laboratories, accordingto the legislation in force at the time (formore information, see the Publications Of-fice of the European Union on the EUR-Lexwebsite: © European Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specifiedvehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the docu-

mentation provided to the purchaser of thevehicle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each in-dividual vehicle, as well as on the drivingstyle, road conditions, traffic conditions, en-vironmental conditions, load or number ofpassengers.

Filling capacities

Tank level55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised load on the roofof your vehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipmentcan increase the empty weight, which means »

327

Technical data

that the possible useful load decreases pro-portionally.

Trailer weightThe maximum permitted drawbar load onthe ball head of the towing bracket is 88 kg.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

328


Engine specifications

2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 221 (300)/5,300-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 400/2,000-5,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,984

Fuel Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 245 (6)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 4.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,170

329

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 215 Dimensions and angles.

330


››› Fig. 215 Ateca 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 868

B Rear projection (mm) 877

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,631

D Length (mm) 4,376

E Front track (mm) 1,573

F Back track (mm) 1,547

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601a)

1,615b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 175

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 18.9°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 23.6°

Turning radius (m) 10.8

Values for the 245/40 R19 ET45 wheel and the 2.0 TSI 221 kw engine

a) Distance to the roof.b) Dimension to the roof bars.

331

Index

IndexNumbers and Symbols12-volt battery

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 297electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Adjustfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 27description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Air conditioningair recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Android Auto™

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43

Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 42check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 277Anti-trap function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Apple CarPlay

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Aspects to think about before starting the

vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Assistance systems

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 252Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . 224

333

Index

front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . 239parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260peripheral view system (Top View Camera) .267PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 239rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263road sign detection system messages . . . . . 74safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . 308Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . 247Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . 113Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205emergency release of the selector lever. . 208kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . 204tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 204towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

BBackrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136, 142Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . 281max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Blown bulbschange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Caresee Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93unlock and lock the vehicle (Keyless Ac-

cess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62tail light bulb in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . 60tail light bulb in the rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Checking levels

engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Check lists

requirements for Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . 170requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . 169requirements for MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Childproof lockselectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

334

Index

Child seatsgroup classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 315special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Climate controlwindscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Clocks

digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Connectors

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 250audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248, 250fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . 240lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286, 287press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 228rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 240refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 284replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Controls and displaysoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . 152

DDangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . 18Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . 166Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Display of road signs on the instrument pan-elactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Disposalseat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

335

Index

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 216with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . 118

Ee-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Easy Open

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . 249Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Electrical accessories

see Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 198Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

automatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 249Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . 238problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238see also Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 217

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Emergency opening

driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Emissions control systemcatalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

336

Index

Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200start (driver instructions with the mechan-

ical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . 196emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . 197switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 290battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 294engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Engine failurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Engine oilchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 293checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Equipmenttelephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

ESCelectronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 249multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321external audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . 159

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . 117Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 224Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Fuel

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Fuel consumptioninertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . 286

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

337

Index

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . 58recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

GGear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 209Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

HHandbrake

see Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118HDC

see Hill descent control (HDC). . . . . . . . . . . 209Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 18Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 127

Hill descent control (HDC).control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

IIdentification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Identity accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84, 152

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . 158customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 173WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Infotainment systemsee Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290, 312Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66, 67

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81digital (Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78use with the multifunction steering wheel . 80

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

338

Index

Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

KKeyless Access

Easy Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 95

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Keysassign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91instructions for the driver (mechanical

contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94, 101vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Lane assist Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . 241

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . 206Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Leaving a parking space with the parking as-

sist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114fog light with cornering light function . . . . . 117headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Loading the luggage compartmentfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 131positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 137

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 131electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 104emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . 105luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 119net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137opening and closing controlled by sensors

(Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . 134

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132339

Index

Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232assisted parting system (Park Assist) . . . . . . 252clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128MirrorLink®

Disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Mirrorsadjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 123anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176, 195

favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181use streaming services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

NNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . 184detailed view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188enter an address for a guide destination . . 186favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . 186increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184managing the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 187navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Other options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 189saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

use the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187use the map to enter the destination . . . . . 187

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Net for luggageluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Noise

brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302, 306

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

OOctane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

340

Index

rear lid with electric opening and closing . 104sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Operating faultautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Operation in winterbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . 121salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Original Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Overview

of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

PPainting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Panoramic roof

see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Park Assist

see the assisted parking system (Park As-sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205with the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Parking aidautomatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . 262fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 264parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263see the assisted parking system (Park As-

sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 264surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 264

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 260, 263

Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . 252angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258automatic interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253conditions for leaving a parking space . . . . 257leaving a parking space (only when parallel

parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 260, 263

ParkPilotsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 260, 263

Partial odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15

Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . 267display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Petroladditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Power socket

faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Power steering

see Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . 22indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Problems and solutionsTrailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

RRadar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

341

Index

preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177(TP) Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

see Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . 239Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . 239, 242

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 107

see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . 104Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 77Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

SS-PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Safetychild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Save fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Screenclean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 23safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

342

Index

folding down and raising the rear seatbackrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 313Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 204Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Sound system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Special characteristics

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 280MirrorLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172peripheral view system (Top View Cam-

era) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . 202driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . 200

the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . 200the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . 69Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 69instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 202service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 72

Steeringcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

343

Index

multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . 204

Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Storage compartment accessoriessee Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 139trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . 137

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Sunshade blindanti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . 111sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Switchhazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Switching offtelephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

TTail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Tail lights on the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . 273weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Telephone

contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Temperature indicatorexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Timeadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 76

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . 202, 204To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 37, 38Top View Camera

see the Peripheral view system (Top ViewCamera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Torquewheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Touch zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276Tow hook

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Towing devicefitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . 280

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 53tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

344

Index

towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Traffic programme

see Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 277connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 264power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 276Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . 280vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . 273, 277

Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267see Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Trailer modesee Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 137Travel Assist

see Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 235Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Tyre pressure monitor systems

Tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . 308Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Tyres

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

UUnlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 94

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . 134Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . 95vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Vehicle carewiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

345

Index

Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Siri™ (Apple CarPlay™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Volumeset for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . 159

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 81Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . 315high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . 315sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Welcome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 306

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Wheelschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 47changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Wheel trim

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Window washerwindow washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Windscreenheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 150Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Winter conditionssunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Wiper and rear window wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 317replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

346

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.07.20

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

A T E C AOwner’s manual

A

TE

CA

Ingl

és (

07.2

0)

575012720BQ

Ingl

és 5

7501

2720

BQ (

07.2

0)

inglés ateca owner’s manualateca owner’s manual ateca inglés 575012720bq (07.20) 575012720bq...

Documents